Annotation of gcc/cse.c, revision 1.1.1.2

1.1       root        1: /* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
                      2:    Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
                      3: 
                      4: This file is part of GNU CC.
                      5: 
                      6: GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
                      7: it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
                      8: the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
                      9: any later version.
                     10: 
                     11: GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
                     12: but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
                     13: MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
                     14: GNU General Public License for more details.
                     15: 
                     16: You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
                     17: along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
                     18: the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.  */
                     19: 
                     20: 
                     21: #include "config.h"
                     22: #include "rtl.h"
                     23: #include "regs.h"
                     24: #include "hard-reg-set.h"
                     25: #include "flags.h"
                     26: #include "real.h"
                     27: #include "insn-config.h"
                     28: #include "recog.h"
                     29: 
                     30: #include <stdio.h>
                     31: #include <setjmp.h>
                     32: 
                     33: /* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
                     34:    through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
                     35:    have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
                     36:    expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
                     37: 
                     38:    It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
                     39:    when control paths merge; so, at each label, we forget all that is
                     40:    known and start fresh.  This can be described as processing each
                     41:    basic block separately.  Note, however, that these are not quite
                     42:    the same as the basic blocks found by a later pass and used for
                     43:    data flow analysis and register packing.  We do not need to start fresh
                     44:    after a conditional jump instruction if there is no label there.
                     45: 
                     46:    We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
                     47:    a hash table for most expressions, and several vectors together
                     48:    with "quantity numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
                     49: 
                     50:    The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
                     51:    because it is faster.  It is possible because registers references
                     52:    contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
                     53:    a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
                     54:    identical if they have the same number.  General expressions
                     55:    do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
                     56:    information recorded on an expression other than a register
                     57:    is to keep it in a hash table.
                     58: 
                     59: Registers and "quantity numbers":
                     60:    
                     61:    At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
                     62:    registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
                     63:    numbers to indicate their contents.  During scan, when the code
                     64:    copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
                     65:    When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
                     66:    quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
                     67:    `reg_qty' records what quantity a register is currently thought
                     68:    of as containing.
                     69: 
                     70:    All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to `max_reg'.
                     71:    If register N has not been assigned a quantity, reg_qty[N] will equal N.
                     72: 
                     73:    Quantity numbers below `max_reg' do not exist and none of the `qty_...'
                     74:    variables should be referenced with an index below `max_reg'.
                     75: 
                     76:    We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
                     77:    quantity number.  `qty_first_reg', `qty_last_reg',
                     78:    `reg_next_eqv' and `reg_prev_eqv' hold these chains.
                     79: 
                     80:    The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
                     81:    Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
                     82:    We replace any equivalent register with that one.
                     83: 
                     84:    If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
                     85:    REG expressions with `qty_mode' must be in the hash table for both
                     86:    registers and must be in the same class.
                     87: 
                     88:    The converse is not true.  Since hard registers may be referenced in
                     89:    any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
                     90:    but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
                     91:    of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
                     92:    
                     93: Constants and quantity numbers
                     94: 
                     95:    When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
                     96:    in the appropriate element of qty_const.  This is in addition to
                     97:    putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
                     98: 
1.1.1.2 ! root       99:    Whether a reg or a constant is preferred is determined by the configuration
1.1       root      100:    macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value.  In any
                    101:    event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
                    102: 
                    103:    When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
                    104:    of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate element
                    105:    of qty_const.
                    106: 
                    107:    Integer constants don't have a machine mode.  However, cse
                    108:    determines the intended machine mode from the destination
                    109:    of the instruction that moves the constant.  The machine mode
                    110:    is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
                    111:    constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
                    112: 
                    113: Other expressions:
                    114: 
                    115:    To record known equivalences among expressions in general
                    116:    we use a hash table called `table'.  It has a fixed number of buckets
                    117:    that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
                    118:    These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
                    119:    hash codes.
                    120: 
                    121:    Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
                    122:    currently have equivalent values.
                    123: 
                    124:    Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
                    125:    the expression.  This is done using `reg_qty' and `qty_first_reg'.
                    126:    The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
                    127:    number, not the register number.
                    128: 
                    129:    When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
                    130:    hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
                    131:    could be different as a result.
                    132: 
                    133:      1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
                    134:      ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed.  That is because
                    135:      nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
                    136:      The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
                    137: 
                    138:      The special cases are when the address is constant or is
                    139:      a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
                    140:      or a static chain pointer.  When such addresses are stored in,
                    141:      we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
                    142:      due to overlap.  `invalidate' does this.
                    143:      All expressions that refer to non-constant
                    144:      memory addresses are also invalidated.  `invalidate_memory' does this.
                    145: 
                    146:      2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
                    147:      containing references to that register, and only those,
                    148:      must be removed.
                    149: 
                    150:    Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
                    151:    a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
                    152:    Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
                    153:    entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
                    154:    changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
                    155:    the register's new value.  This sequence of circumstances is rare
                    156:    within any one basic block.
                    157: 
                    158:    The vectors `reg_tick' and `reg_in_table' are used to detect this case.
                    159:    reg_tick[i] is incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
                    160:    reg_in_table[i] holds -1 if no references to register i have been
                    161:    entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value reg_tick[i] had
                    162:    when the references were entered.  If we want to enter a reference
                    163:    and reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i], we must scan and remove old references.
                    164:    Until we want to enter a new entry, the mere fact that the two vectors
                    165:    don't match makes the entries be ignored if anyone tries to match them.
                    166: 
                    167:    Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
                    168:    the equivalent-register chains.  However, the vectors `reg_tick'
                    169:    and `reg_in_table' do not apply to expressions which are simple
                    170:    register references.  These expressions are removed from the table
                    171:    immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
                    172:    we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
                    173:    the register.
                    174: 
                    175:    A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
                    176:    reuse.  A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
                    177:    invalidates everything that resides in memory.
                    178: 
                    179: Related expressions:
                    180: 
                    181:    Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
                    182:    are called related.  When a constant expression is put in
                    183:    the table, the related expression with no constant term
                    184:    is also entered.  These are made to point at each other
                    185:    so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
                    186:    register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression.  */
                    187:    
                    188: /* One plus largest register number used in this function.  */
                    189: 
                    190: static int max_reg;
                    191: 
                    192: /* Length of vectors indexed by quantity number.
                    193:    We know in advance we will not need a quantity number this big.  */
                    194: 
                    195: static int max_qty;
                    196: 
                    197: /* Next quantity number to be allocated.
                    198:    This is 1 + the largest number needed so far.  */
                    199: 
                    200: static int next_qty;
                    201: 
                    202: /* Indexed by quantity number, gives the first (or last) (pseudo) register 
                    203:    in the chain of registers that currently contain this quantity.  */
                    204: 
                    205: static int *qty_first_reg;
                    206: static int *qty_last_reg;
                    207: 
                    208: /* Index by quantity number, gives the mode of the quantity.  */
                    209: 
                    210: static enum machine_mode *qty_mode;
                    211: 
                    212: /* Indexed by quantity number, gives the rtx of the constant value of the
                    213:    quantity, or zero if it does not have a known value.
                    214:    A sum of the frame pointer (or arg pointer) plus a constant
                    215:    can also be entered here.  */
                    216: 
                    217: static rtx *qty_const;
                    218: 
                    219: /* Indexed by qty number, gives the insn that stored the constant value
                    220:    recorded in `qty_const'.  */
                    221: 
                    222: static rtx *qty_const_insn;
                    223: 
                    224: /* The next three variables are used to track when a comparison between a
                    225:    quantity and some constant or register has been passed.  In that case, we
                    226:    know the results of the comparison in case we see it again.  These variables
                    227:    record a comparison that is known to be true.  */
                    228: 
                    229: /* Indexed by qty number, gives the rtx code of a comparison with a known
                    230:    result involving this quantity.  If none, it is UNKNOWN.  */
                    231: static enum rtx_code *qty_comparison_code;
                    232: 
                    233: /* Indexed by qty number, gives the constant being compared against in a
                    234:    comparison of known result.  If no such comparison, it is undefined.
                    235:    If the comparison is not with a constant, it is zero.  */
                    236: 
                    237: static rtx *qty_comparison_const;
                    238: 
                    239: /* Indexed by qty number, gives the quantity being compared against in a
                    240:    comparison of known result.  If no such comparison, if it undefined.
                    241:    If the comparison is not with a register, it is -1.  */
                    242: 
                    243: static int *qty_comparison_qty;
                    244: 
                    245: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                    246: /* For machines that have a CC0, we do not record its value in the hash
                    247:    table since its use is guaranteed to be the insn immediately following
                    248:    its definition and any other insn is presumed to invalidate it.
                    249: 
                    250:    Instead, we store below the value last assigned to CC0.  If it should
                    251:    happen to be a constant, it is stored in preference to the actual
                    252:    assigned value.  In case it is a constant, we store the mode in which
                    253:    the constant should be interpreted.  */
                    254: 
                    255: static rtx prev_insn_cc0;
                    256: static enum machine_mode prev_insn_cc0_mode;
                    257: #endif
                    258: 
                    259: /* Previous actual insn.  0 if at first insn of basic block.  */
                    260: 
                    261: static rtx prev_insn;
                    262: 
                    263: /* Insn being scanned.  */
                    264: 
                    265: static rtx this_insn;
                    266: 
                    267: /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the quantity number
                    268:    of the register's current contents.  */
                    269: 
                    270: static int *reg_qty;
                    271: 
                    272: /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of the next (or
                    273:    previous) (pseudo) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
                    274:    value.
                    275: 
                    276:    Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
                    277: 
                    278:    If reg_qty[N] == N, reg_next_eqv[N] is undefined.  */
                    279: 
                    280: static int *reg_next_eqv;
                    281: static int *reg_prev_eqv;
                    282: 
                    283: /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of times
                    284:    that register has been altered in the current basic block.  */
                    285: 
                    286: static int *reg_tick;
                    287: 
                    288: /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the reg_tick value at which
                    289:    rtx's containing this register are valid in the hash table.
                    290:    If this does not equal the current reg_tick value, such expressions
                    291:    existing in the hash table are invalid.
                    292:    If this is -1, no expressions containing this register have been
                    293:    entered in the table.  */
                    294: 
                    295: static int *reg_in_table;
                    296: 
                    297: /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is 
                    298:    currently a REG expression in the hash table.  Note the difference
                    299:    from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
                    300:    expression in the table.  */
                    301: 
                    302: static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
                    303: 
                    304: /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers that are invalidated
                    305:    by a CALL_INSN.  */
                    306: 
                    307: static HARD_REG_SET regs_invalidated_by_call;
                    308: 
                    309: /* Two vectors of ints:
                    310:    one containing max_reg -1's; the other max_reg + 500 (an approximation
                    311:    for max_qty) elements where element i contains i.
                    312:    These are used to initialize various other vectors fast.  */
                    313: 
                    314: static int *all_minus_one;
                    315: static int *consec_ints;
                    316: 
                    317: /* CUID of insn that starts the basic block currently being cse-processed.  */
                    318: 
                    319: static int cse_basic_block_start;
                    320: 
                    321: /* CUID of insn that ends the basic block currently being cse-processed.  */
                    322: 
                    323: static int cse_basic_block_end;
                    324: 
                    325: /* Vector mapping INSN_UIDs to cuids.
1.1.1.2 ! root      326:    The cuids are like uids but increase monotonically always.
1.1       root      327:    We use them to see whether a reg is used outside a given basic block.  */
                    328: 
                    329: static short *uid_cuid;
                    330: 
                    331: /* Get the cuid of an insn.  */
                    332: 
                    333: #define INSN_CUID(INSN) (uid_cuid[INSN_UID (INSN)])
                    334: 
                    335: /* Nonzero if cse has altered conditional jump insns
                    336:    in such a way that jump optimization should be redone.  */
                    337: 
                    338: static int cse_jumps_altered;
                    339: 
                    340: /* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record
                    341:    if it notices a reference to CC0, PC, or some other volatile
                    342:    subexpression.  */
                    343: 
                    344: static int do_not_record;
                    345: 
                    346: /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
                    347:    if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed.  */
                    348: 
                    349: static int hash_arg_in_memory;
                    350: 
                    351: /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
                    352:    if it notices a reference to memory that's part of a structure.  */
                    353: 
                    354: static int hash_arg_in_struct;
                    355: 
                    356: /* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
                    357:    each recording one expression's information.
                    358:    That expression is in the `exp' field.
                    359: 
                    360:    Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
                    361:    through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
                    362: 
                    363:    Each set of expressions with equivalent values
                    364:    are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
                    365:    and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
                    366:    the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
                    367:    that chain.  The chain is in order of increasing cost.
                    368:    Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
                    369: 
                    370:    The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
                    371:    involve any reference to memory.  These elements are removed
                    372:    whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
                    373:    To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
                    374:    the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
                    375:    the frame pointer or argument pointer.
                    376: 
                    377:    The `in_struct' field is nonzero for elements that
                    378:    involve any reference to memory inside a structure or array.
                    379: 
                    380:    The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
                    381:    (that differ by adding an integer).
                    382:    The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
                    383:    `related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
                    384:    chain is not useful.
                    385: 
                    386:    The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
                    387: 
                    388:    The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
                    389:    a fixed address).
                    390: 
                    391:    The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
                    392: 
                    393:    The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
                    394:    if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
                    395:    field is the mode it was being used as.  Each constant is
                    396:    recorded separately for each mode it is used with.  */
                    397: 
                    398: 
                    399: struct table_elt
                    400: {
                    401:   rtx exp;
                    402:   struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
                    403:   struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
                    404:   struct table_elt *next_same_value;
                    405:   struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
                    406:   struct table_elt *first_same_value;
                    407:   struct table_elt *related_value;
                    408:   int cost;
                    409:   enum machine_mode mode;
                    410:   char in_memory;
                    411:   char in_struct;
                    412:   char is_const;
                    413:   char flag;
                    414: };
                    415: 
                    416: #define HASHBITS 16
                    417: 
                    418: /* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
                    419:    things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
                    420:    down a lot of loops that happen frequently.  */
                    421: #define NBUCKETS 31
                    422: 
                    423: /* Compute hash code of X in mode M.  Special-case case where X is a pseudo
                    424:    register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set).  */
                    425: 
                    426: #define HASH(X, M)     \
                    427:  (GET_CODE (X) == REG && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER    \
                    428:   ? ((((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[REGNO (X)]) % NBUCKETS)       \
                    429:   : canon_hash (X, M) % NBUCKETS)
                    430: 
                    431: /* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for CSE.
                    432:    It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
                    433:    non-fixed hard regs.
                    434:    A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed,
                    435:    but not if it is an overlapping register.  */
                    436: #ifdef OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
                    437: #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N)  \
                    438:   (((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N])      \
                    439:    && ! OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P ((N)))
                    440: #else
                    441: #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N)  \
                    442:   ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N])
                    443: #endif
                    444: 
                    445: /* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt.  Fixed
                    446:    hard registers are the cheapest with a cost of 0.  Next come pseudos
                    447:    with a cost of one and other hard registers with a cost of 2.  Aside
                    448:    from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'.  */
                    449: 
                    450: #define COST(X)                                                \
                    451:   (GET_CODE (X) == REG                                 \
                    452:    ? (REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1           \
                    453:       : (FIXED_REGNO_P (REGNO (X))                     \
                    454:         && REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (X)) != NO_REGS) ? 0 \
                    455:       : 2)                                             \
                    456:    : rtx_cost (X) * 2)                                 \
                    457: 
                    458: /* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
                    459:    into the `qty_...' variables.  */
                    460: 
                    461: #define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (reg_qty[N] != (N))
                    462: 
                    463: static struct table_elt *table[NBUCKETS];
                    464: 
                    465: /* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
                    466:    but currently removed from the table.  */
                    467: 
                    468: static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
                    469: 
                    470: /* Number of `struct table_elt' structures made so far for this function.  */
                    471: 
                    472: static int n_elements_made;
                    473: 
                    474: /* Maximum value `n_elements_made' has had so far in this compilation
                    475:    for functions previously processed.  */
                    476: 
                    477: static int max_elements_made;
                    478: 
                    479: /* Surviving equivalence class when two equivalence classes are merged 
                    480:    by recording the effects of a jump in the last insn.  Zero if the
                    481:    last insn was not a conditional jump.  */
                    482: 
                    483: static struct table_elt *last_jump_equiv_class;
                    484: 
                    485: /* Set to the cost of a constant pool reference if one was found for a
                    486:    symbolic constant.  If this was found, it means we should try to
                    487:    convert constants into constant pool entries if they don't fit in
                    488:    the insn.  */
                    489: 
                    490: static int constant_pool_entries_cost;
                    491: 
                    492: /* Bits describing what kind of values in memory must be invalidated
                    493:    for a particular instruction.  If all three bits are zero,
                    494:    no memory refs need to be invalidated.  Each bit is more powerful
                    495:    than the preceding ones, and if a bit is set then the preceding
                    496:    bits are also set.
                    497: 
                    498:    Here is how the bits are set:
                    499:    Pushing onto the stack invalidates only the stack pointer,
                    500:    writing at a fixed address invalidates only variable addresses,
                    501:    writing in a structure element at variable address
                    502:      invalidates all but scalar variables,
                    503:    and writing in anything else at variable address invalidates everything.  */
                    504: 
                    505: struct write_data
                    506: {
                    507:   int sp : 1;                  /* Invalidate stack pointer. */
                    508:   int var : 1;                 /* Invalidate variable addresses.  */
                    509:   int nonscalar : 1;           /* Invalidate all but scalar variables.  */
                    510:   int all : 1;                 /* Invalidate all memory refs.  */
                    511: };
                    512: 
                    513: /* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer).  We check for
                    514:    virtual regs here because the simplify_*_operation routines are called
                    515:    by integrate.c, which is called before virtual register instantiation.  */
                    516: 
                    517: #define FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P(X)                                   \
                    518:   ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx || (X) == arg_pointer_rtx          \
                    519:    || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx                            \
                    520:    || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx                         \
                    521:    || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
                    522:        && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx                    \
                    523:           || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx                    \
                    524:           || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx             \
                    525:           || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)))
                    526: 
                    527: /* Similar, but also allows reference to the stack pointer.  */
                    528: 
                    529: #define NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P(X)                                 \
                    530:   (FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P (X)                                       \
                    531:    || (X) == stack_pointer_rtx                                 \
                    532:    || (X) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx                         \
                    533:    || (X) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx                         \
                    534:    || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
                    535:        && (XEXP (X, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx                    \
                    536:           || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx          \
                    537:           || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx)))
                    538: 
                    539: static struct table_elt *lookup ();
                    540: static void free_element ();
                    541: 
                    542: static int insert_regs ();
                    543: static void rehash_using_reg ();
                    544: static void remove_invalid_refs ();
                    545: static int exp_equiv_p ();
                    546: int refers_to_p ();
                    547: int refers_to_mem_p ();
                    548: static void invalidate_from_clobbers ();
                    549: static int safe_hash ();
                    550: static int canon_hash ();
                    551: static rtx fold_rtx ();
                    552: static rtx equiv_constant ();
                    553: static void record_jump_cond ();
                    554: static void note_mem_written ();
                    555: static int cse_rtx_addr_varies_p ();
                    556: static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args ();
                    557: static void cse_insn ();
                    558: static void cse_set_around_loop ();
                    559: 
                    560: /* Return an estimate of the cost of computing rtx X.
                    561:    One use is in cse, to decide which expression to keep in the hash table.
                    562:    Another is in rtl generation, to pick the cheapest way to multiply.
                    563:    Other uses like the latter are expected in the future.  */
                    564: 
                    565: /* Return the right cost to give to an operation
                    566:    to make the cost of the corresponding register-to-register instruction
                    567:    N times that of a fast register-to-register instruction.  */
                    568: 
                    569: #define COSTS_N_INSNS(N) ((N) * 4 - 2)
                    570: 
                    571: int
                    572: rtx_cost (x)
                    573:      rtx x;
                    574: {
                    575:   register int i, j;
                    576:   register enum rtx_code code;
                    577:   register char *fmt;
                    578:   register int total;
                    579: 
                    580:   if (x == 0)
                    581:     return 0;
                    582: 
                    583:   /* Compute the default costs of certain things.
                    584:      Note that RTX_COSTS can override the defaults.  */
                    585: 
                    586:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                    587:   switch (code)
                    588:     {
                    589:     case MULT:
                    590:       /* Count multiplication by 2**n as a shift,
                    591:         because if we are considering it, we would output it as a shift.  */
                    592:       if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT
                    593:          && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) >= 0)
                    594:        total = 2;
                    595:       else
                    596:        total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
                    597:       break;
                    598:     case DIV:
                    599:     case UDIV:
                    600:     case MOD:
                    601:     case UMOD:
                    602:       total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
                    603:       break;
                    604:     case USE:
                    605:       /* Used in loop.c and combine.c as a marker.  */
                    606:       total = 0;
                    607:       break;
1.1.1.2 ! root      608:     case ASM_OPERANDS:
        !           609:       /* We don't want these to be used in substitutions because
        !           610:         we have no way of validating the resulting insn.  So assign
        !           611:         anything containing an ASM_OPERANDS a very high cost.  */
        !           612:       total = 1000;
        !           613:       break;
1.1       root      614:     default:
                    615:       total = 2;
                    616:     }
                    617: 
                    618:   switch (code)
                    619:     {
                    620:     case REG:
                    621:       return 1;
                    622:     case SUBREG:
                    623:       return 2;
                    624: #ifdef RTX_COSTS
                    625:       RTX_COSTS (x, code);
                    626: #endif 
                    627:       CONST_COSTS (x, code);
                    628:     }
                    629: 
                    630:   /* Sum the costs of the sub-rtx's, plus cost of this operation,
                    631:      which is already in total.  */
                    632: 
                    633:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                    634:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                    635:     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                    636:       total += rtx_cost (XEXP (x, i));
                    637:     else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                    638:       for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                    639:        total += rtx_cost (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
                    640: 
                    641:   return total;
                    642: }
                    643: 
                    644: /* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
                    645:    for a new basic block.  */
                    646: 
                    647: static void
                    648: new_basic_block ()
                    649: {
                    650:   register int i;
                    651: 
                    652:   next_qty = max_reg;
                    653: 
                    654:   bzero (reg_tick, max_reg * sizeof (int));
                    655: 
                    656:   bcopy (all_minus_one, reg_in_table, max_reg * sizeof (int));
                    657:   bcopy (consec_ints, reg_qty, max_reg * sizeof (int));
                    658:   CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
                    659: 
                    660:   /* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
                    661:      much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'.  */
                    662: 
                    663:   for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
                    664:     {
                    665:       register struct table_elt *this, *next;
                    666:       for (this = table[i]; this; this = next)
                    667:        {
                    668:          next = this->next_same_hash;
                    669:          free_element (this);
                    670:        }
                    671:     }
                    672: 
                    673:   bzero (table, sizeof table);
                    674: 
                    675:   prev_insn = 0;
                    676: 
                    677: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                    678:   prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
                    679: #endif
                    680: }
                    681: 
                    682: /* Say that register REG contains a quantity not in any register before
                    683:    and initialize that quantity.  */
                    684: 
                    685: static void
                    686: make_new_qty (reg)
                    687:      register int reg;
                    688: {
                    689:   register int q;
                    690: 
                    691:   if (next_qty >= max_qty)
                    692:     abort ();
                    693: 
                    694:   q = reg_qty[reg] = next_qty++;
                    695:   qty_first_reg[q] = reg;
                    696:   qty_last_reg[q] = reg;
                    697:   qty_const[q] = qty_const_insn[q] = 0;
                    698:   qty_comparison_code[q] = UNKNOWN;
                    699: 
                    700:   reg_next_eqv[reg] = reg_prev_eqv[reg] = -1;
                    701: }
                    702: 
                    703: /* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
                    704:    OLD is not changing; NEW is.  */
                    705: 
                    706: static void
                    707: make_regs_eqv (new, old)
                    708:      register int new, old;
                    709: {
                    710:   register int lastr, firstr;
                    711:   register int q = reg_qty[old];
                    712: 
                    713:   /* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number.  */
                    714:   if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old))
                    715:     abort ();
                    716: 
                    717:   reg_qty[new] = q;
                    718:   firstr = qty_first_reg[q];
                    719:   lastr = qty_last_reg[q];
                    720: 
                    721:   /* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything.  Prefer pseudo regs to other
                    722:      hard regs.  Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
                    723:      of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
                    724:      make it the new canonical replacement for this qty.  */
                    725:   if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
                    726:       /* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS.  This means
                    727:         that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
                    728:         they cannot be used in substitutions or cannonicallizations
                    729:         either.  */
                    730:       && (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new) != NO_REGS)
                    731:       && ((new < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new))
                    732:          || (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                    733:              && (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                    734:                  || ((uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]] > cse_basic_block_end
                    735:                       || (uid_cuid[regno_first_uid[new]]
                    736:                           < cse_basic_block_start))
                    737:                      && (uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]]
                    738:                          > uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[firstr]]))))))
                    739:     {
                    740:       reg_prev_eqv[firstr] = new;
                    741:       reg_next_eqv[new] = firstr;
                    742:       reg_prev_eqv[new] = -1;
                    743:       qty_first_reg[q] = new;
                    744:     }
                    745:   else
                    746:     {
                    747:       /* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
                    748:         Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
                    749:         end.  Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
                    750:         equivalent for anything.  */
                    751:       while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_prev_eqv[lastr] >= 0
                    752:             && (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
                    753:             && new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                    754:        lastr = reg_prev_eqv[lastr];
                    755:       reg_next_eqv[new] = reg_next_eqv[lastr];
                    756:       if (reg_next_eqv[lastr] >= 0)
                    757:        reg_prev_eqv[reg_next_eqv[lastr]] = new;
                    758:       else
                    759:        qty_last_reg[q] = new;
                    760:       reg_next_eqv[lastr] = new;
                    761:       reg_prev_eqv[new] = lastr;
                    762:     }
                    763: }
                    764: 
                    765: /* Remove REG from its equivalence class.  */
                    766: 
                    767: static void
                    768: delete_reg_equiv (reg)
                    769:      register int reg;
                    770: {
                    771:   register int n = reg_next_eqv[reg];
                    772:   register int p = reg_prev_eqv[reg];
                    773:   register int q = reg_qty[reg];
                    774: 
                    775:   /* If invalid, do nothing.  N and P above are undefined in that case.  */
                    776:   if (q == reg)
                    777:     return;
                    778: 
                    779:   if (n != -1)
                    780:     reg_prev_eqv[n] = p;
                    781:   else
                    782:     qty_last_reg[q] = p;
                    783:   if (p != -1)
                    784:     reg_next_eqv[p] = n;
                    785:   else
                    786:     qty_first_reg[q] = n;
                    787: 
                    788:   reg_qty[reg] = reg;
                    789: }
                    790: 
                    791: /* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
                    792:    that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
                    793: 
                    794:    Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
                    795:    as subexpressions will be considered valid.
                    796: 
                    797:    mention_regs is not called when a register itself
                    798:    is being stored in the table.
                    799: 
                    800:    Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
                    801:    of X.  */
                    802: 
                    803: static int
                    804: mention_regs (x)
                    805:      rtx x;
                    806: {
                    807:   register enum rtx_code code;
                    808:   register int i, j;
                    809:   register char *fmt;
                    810:   register int changed = 0;
                    811: 
                    812:   if (x == 0)
                    813:     return;
                    814: 
                    815:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                    816:   if (code == REG)
                    817:     {
                    818:       register int regno = REGNO (x);
                    819:       register int endregno
                    820:        = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
                    821:                   : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)));
                    822:       int i;
                    823: 
                    824:       for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
                    825:        {
                    826:          if (reg_in_table[i] >= 0 && reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
                    827:            remove_invalid_refs (i);
                    828: 
                    829:          reg_in_table[i] = reg_tick[i];
                    830:        }
                    831: 
                    832:       return 0;
                    833:     }
                    834: 
                    835:   /* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
                    836:      that does not have a quantity, give it one.  This is so that a later
                    837:      call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
                    838:      hash code and not found in the table after that call.
                    839: 
                    840:      It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
                    841:      fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
                    842:      call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
                    843:      use of the register is in the comparison.  */
                    844: 
                    845:   if (code == COMPARE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
                    846:     {
                    847:       if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
                    848:          && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
                    849:        if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), 0, 0))
                    850:          {
                    851:            rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
                    852:            changed = 1;
                    853:          }
                    854: 
                    855:       if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == REG
                    856:          && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
                    857:        if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), 0, 0))
                    858:          {
                    859:            rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
                    860:            changed = 1;
                    861:          }
                    862:     }
                    863: 
                    864:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                    865:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                    866:     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                    867:       changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
                    868:     else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                    869:       for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                    870:        changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
                    871: 
                    872:   return changed;
                    873: }
                    874: 
                    875: /* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
                    876:    with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
                    877:    (If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
                    878:    If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
                    879:    Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
                    880:    before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
                    881: 
                    882:    Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
                    883:    so X's hash code may be different.  */
                    884: 
                    885: static int
                    886: insert_regs (x, classp, modified)
                    887:      rtx x;
                    888:      struct table_elt *classp;
                    889:      int modified;
                    890: {
                    891:   if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
                    892:     {
                    893:       register int regno = REGNO (x);
                    894: 
                    895:       if (modified
                    896:          || ! (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno)
                    897:                && qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] == GET_MODE (x)))
                    898:        {
                    899:          if (classp)
                    900:            for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
                    901:                 classp != 0;
                    902:                 classp = classp->next_same_value)
                    903:              if (GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG
                    904:                  && GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
                    905:                {
                    906:                  make_regs_eqv (regno, REGNO (classp->exp));
                    907:                  return 1;
                    908:                }
                    909: 
                    910:          make_new_qty (regno);
                    911:          qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] = GET_MODE (x);
                    912:          return 1;
                    913:        }
                    914:     }
                    915:   else
                    916:     return mention_regs (x);
                    917: }
                    918: 
                    919: /* Look in or update the hash table.  */
                    920: 
                    921: /* Put the element ELT on the list of free elements.  */
                    922: 
                    923: static void
                    924: free_element (elt)
                    925:      struct table_elt *elt;
                    926: {
                    927:   elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
                    928:   free_element_chain = elt;
                    929: }
                    930: 
                    931: /* Return an element that is free for use.  */
                    932: 
                    933: static struct table_elt *
                    934: get_element ()
                    935: {
                    936:   struct table_elt *elt = free_element_chain;
                    937:   if (elt)
                    938:     {
                    939:       free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
                    940:       return elt;
                    941:     }
                    942:   n_elements_made++;
                    943:   return (struct table_elt *) oballoc (sizeof (struct table_elt));
                    944: }
                    945: 
                    946: /* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
                    947:    HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
                    948:    It's an argument because often that is known in advance
                    949:    and we save much time not recomputing it.  */
                    950: 
                    951: static void
                    952: remove_from_table (elt, hash)
                    953:      register struct table_elt *elt;
                    954:      int hash;
                    955: {
                    956:   if (elt == 0)
                    957:     return;
                    958: 
                    959:   /* Mark this element as removed.  See cse_insn.  */
                    960:   elt->first_same_value = 0;
                    961: 
                    962:   /* Remove the table element from its equivalence class.  */
                    963:      
                    964:   {
                    965:     register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
                    966:     register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
                    967: 
                    968:     if (next) next->prev_same_value = prev;
                    969: 
                    970:     if (prev)
                    971:       prev->next_same_value = next;
                    972:     else
                    973:       {
                    974:        register struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
                    975:        while (next)
                    976:          {
                    977:            next->first_same_value = newfirst;
                    978:            next = next->next_same_value;
                    979:          }
                    980:       }
                    981:   }
                    982: 
                    983:   /* Remove the table element from its hash bucket.  */
                    984: 
                    985:   {
                    986:     register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
                    987:     register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
                    988: 
                    989:     if (next) next->prev_same_hash = prev;
                    990: 
                    991:     if (prev)
                    992:       prev->next_same_hash = next;
                    993:     else if (table[hash] == elt)
                    994:       table[hash] = next;
                    995:     else
                    996:       {
                    997:        /* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket.  This can happen
                    998:           when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'.  Search
                    999:           for the hash bucket that it heads.  This happens only very
                   1000:           rarely, so the cost is acceptable.  */
                   1001:        for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
                   1002:          if (table[hash] == elt)
                   1003:            table[hash] = next;
                   1004:       }
                   1005:   }
                   1006: 
                   1007:   /* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain.  */
                   1008: 
                   1009:   if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
                   1010:     {
                   1011:       register struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
                   1012:       while (p->related_value != elt)
                   1013:        p = p->related_value;
                   1014:       p->related_value = elt->related_value;
                   1015:       if (p->related_value == p)
                   1016:        p->related_value = 0;
                   1017:     }
                   1018: 
                   1019:   free_element (elt);
                   1020: }
                   1021: 
                   1022: /* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
                   1023:    or 0 if X is not in the table.
                   1024: 
                   1025:    MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
                   1026:    with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
                   1027: 
                   1028:    Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
                   1029:    looks like X.  */
                   1030: 
                   1031: static struct table_elt *
                   1032: lookup (x, hash, mode)
                   1033:      rtx x;
                   1034:      int hash;
                   1035:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1036: {
                   1037:   register struct table_elt *p;
                   1038: 
                   1039:   for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
                   1040:     if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && GET_CODE (x) == REG)
                   1041:                            || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, GET_CODE (x) != REG, 0)))
                   1042:       return p;
                   1043: 
                   1044:   return 0;
                   1045: }
                   1046: 
                   1047: /* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
                   1048:    Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register.  */
                   1049: 
                   1050: static struct table_elt *
                   1051: lookup_for_remove (x, hash, mode)
                   1052:      rtx x;
                   1053:      int hash;
                   1054:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1055: {
                   1056:   register struct table_elt *p;
                   1057: 
                   1058:   if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
                   1059:     {
                   1060:       int regno = REGNO (x);
                   1061:       /* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
                   1062:         invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0).  */
                   1063:       for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
                   1064:        if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
                   1065:            && REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
                   1066:          return p;
                   1067:     }
                   1068:   else
                   1069:     {
                   1070:       for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
                   1071:        if (mode == p->mode && (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, 0)))
                   1072:          return p;
                   1073:     }
                   1074: 
                   1075:   return 0;
                   1076: }
                   1077: 
                   1078: /* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
                   1079:    If one is found, return that expression.  */
                   1080: 
                   1081: static rtx
                   1082: lookup_as_function (x, code)
                   1083:      rtx x;
                   1084:      enum rtx_code code;
                   1085: {
                   1086:   register struct table_elt *p = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, VOIDmode) % NBUCKETS,
                   1087:                                         GET_MODE (x));
                   1088:   if (p == 0)
                   1089:     return 0;
                   1090: 
                   1091:   for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   1092:     {
                   1093:       if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
                   1094:          /* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table.  */
                   1095:          && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
                   1096:        return p->exp;
                   1097:     }
                   1098:   
                   1099:   return 0;
                   1100: }
                   1101: 
                   1102: /* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code
                   1103:    and CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in
                   1104:    (or 0 if a new class should be made).
                   1105:    It is inserted at the proper position to keep the class in
                   1106:    the order cheapest first.
                   1107: 
                   1108:    MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
                   1109:    with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
                   1110: 
                   1111:    For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
                   1112:    goes in front, except that the first element in the list
                   1113:    remains first unless a cheaper element is added.  The order of
                   1114:    pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
                   1115:    find the cheapest when a register is retreived from the table.
                   1116: 
                   1117:    The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
                   1118:    The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
                   1119: 
                   1120:    You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
                   1121:    and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
                   1122:    you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
                   1123: 
                   1124:    If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities.  */
                   1125: 
                   1126: #define CHEAPER(X,Y)   ((X)->cost < (Y)->cost)
                   1127: 
                   1128: static struct table_elt *
                   1129: insert (x, classp, hash, mode)
                   1130:      register rtx x;
                   1131:      register struct table_elt *classp;
                   1132:      int hash;
                   1133:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1134: {
                   1135:   register struct table_elt *elt;
                   1136: 
                   1137:   /* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
                   1138:      something is wrong.  */
                   1139:   if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
                   1140:     abort ();
                   1141: 
                   1142:   /* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table.  */
                   1143:   if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   1144:     {
                   1145:       int regno = REGNO (x);
                   1146:       int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
                   1147:       int i;
                   1148: 
                   1149:       for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
                   1150:            SET_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
                   1151:     }
                   1152: 
                   1153: 
                   1154:   /* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket.  */
                   1155: 
                   1156:   elt = get_element ();
                   1157:   elt->exp = x;
                   1158:   elt->cost = COST (x);
                   1159:   elt->next_same_value = 0;
                   1160:   elt->prev_same_value = 0;
                   1161:   elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
                   1162:   elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
                   1163:   elt->related_value = 0;
                   1164:   elt->in_memory = 0;
                   1165:   elt->mode = mode;
                   1166:   elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x)
                   1167:                   /* GNU C++ takes advantage of this for `this'
                   1168:                      (and other const values).  */
                   1169:                   || (RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x)
                   1170:                       && GET_CODE (x) == REG
                   1171:                       && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   1172:                   || FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P (x));
                   1173: 
                   1174:   if (table[hash])
                   1175:     table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
                   1176:   table[hash] = elt;
                   1177: 
                   1178:   /* Put it into the proper value-class.  */
                   1179:   if (classp)
                   1180:     {
                   1181:       classp = classp->first_same_value;
                   1182:       if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
                   1183:        /* Insert at the head of the class */
                   1184:        {
                   1185:          register struct table_elt *p;
                   1186:          elt->next_same_value = classp;
                   1187:          classp->prev_same_value = elt;
                   1188:          elt->first_same_value = elt;
                   1189: 
                   1190:          for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   1191:            p->first_same_value = elt;
                   1192:        }
                   1193:       else
                   1194:        {
                   1195:          /* Insert not at head of the class.  */
                   1196:          /* Put it after the last element cheaper than X.  */
                   1197:          register struct table_elt *p, *next;
                   1198:          for (p = classp; (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
                   1199:               p = next);
                   1200:          /* Put it after P and before NEXT.  */
                   1201:          elt->next_same_value = next;
                   1202:          if (next)
                   1203:            next->prev_same_value = elt;
                   1204:          elt->prev_same_value = p;
                   1205:          p->next_same_value = elt;
                   1206:          elt->first_same_value = classp;
                   1207:        }
                   1208:     }
                   1209:   else
                   1210:     elt->first_same_value = elt;
                   1211: 
                   1212:   /* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
                   1213:      being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
                   1214: 
                   1215:      If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
                   1216:      and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register.  So
                   1217:      we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
                   1218:      inserted).
                   1219: 
                   1220:      If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
                   1221:      constant, we must check the entire class.
                   1222: 
                   1223:      If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
                   1224:      update `qty_const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
                   1225:      insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant.  */
                   1226: 
                   1227:   if (elt->is_const && classp && GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG)
                   1228:     {
                   1229:       qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]]
                   1230:        = gen_lowpart_if_possible (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]], x);
                   1231:       qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]] = this_insn;
                   1232:     }
                   1233: 
                   1234:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && classp && ! qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
                   1235:     {
                   1236:       register struct table_elt *p;
                   1237: 
                   1238:       for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
                   1239:        {
                   1240:          if (p->is_const)
                   1241:            {
                   1242:              qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
                   1243:                = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
                   1244:              qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
                   1245:              break;
                   1246:            }
                   1247:        }
                   1248:     }
                   1249: 
                   1250:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
                   1251:           && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
                   1252:     qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
                   1253: 
                   1254:   /* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
                   1255:      and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
                   1256:      link it up with related expressions.  */
                   1257:   if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
                   1258:     {
                   1259:       rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
                   1260:       int subhash;
                   1261:       struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
                   1262: 
                   1263:       if (subexp != 0)
                   1264:        {
                   1265:          /* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table.  */
                   1266:          subhash = safe_hash (subexp, mode) % NBUCKETS;
                   1267:          subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
                   1268:          if (subelt == 0)
                   1269:            subelt = insert (subexp, 0, subhash, mode);
                   1270:          /* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none.  */
                   1271:          if (subelt->related_value == 0)
                   1272:            subelt->related_value = subelt;
                   1273:          /* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT.  */
                   1274:          subelt_prev = subelt;
                   1275:          while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
                   1276:            subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
                   1277:          /* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
                   1278:             This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one.  */
                   1279:          elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
                   1280:          subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
                   1281:        }
                   1282:     }
                   1283: 
                   1284:   return elt;
                   1285: }
                   1286: 
                   1287: /* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
                   1288:    CLASS2 into CLASS1.  This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
                   1289:    the two classes equivalent.
                   1290: 
                   1291:    CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
                   1292:    call.
                   1293: 
                   1294:    Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied.  */
                   1295: 
                   1296: static void
                   1297: merge_equiv_classes (class1, class2)
                   1298:      struct table_elt *class1, *class2;
                   1299: {
                   1300:   struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new;
                   1301: 
                   1302:   /* Ensure we start with the head of the classes.  */
                   1303:   class1 = class1->first_same_value;
                   1304:   class2 = class2->first_same_value;
                   1305: 
                   1306:   /* If they were already equal, forget it.  */
                   1307:   if (class1 == class2)
                   1308:     return;
                   1309: 
                   1310:   for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
                   1311:     {
                   1312:       int hash;
                   1313:       rtx exp = elt->exp;
                   1314:       enum machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
                   1315: 
                   1316:       next = elt->next_same_value;
                   1317: 
                   1318:       /* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
                   1319:         Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
                   1320:         hash code (it also isn't necessary). */
                   1321:       if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, 0))
                   1322:        {
                   1323:          hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
                   1324:          hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
                   1325:          hash = HASH (exp, mode);
                   1326:              
                   1327:          if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG)
                   1328:            delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
                   1329:              
                   1330:          remove_from_table (elt, hash);
                   1331: 
                   1332:          if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0))
                   1333:            hash = HASH (exp, mode);
                   1334:          new = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
                   1335:          new->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   1336:          new->in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   1337:        }
                   1338:     }
                   1339: }
                   1340: 
                   1341: /* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid,
                   1342:    all expressions whose values could be altered by storing in X.
                   1343:    X is a register, a subreg, or a memory reference with nonvarying address
                   1344:    (because, when a memory reference with a varying address is stored in,
                   1345:    all memory references are removed by invalidate_memory
                   1346:    so specific invalidation is superfluous).
                   1347: 
                   1348:    A nonvarying address may be just a register or just
                   1349:    a symbol reference, or it may be either of those plus
                   1350:    a numeric offset.  */
                   1351: 
                   1352: static void
                   1353: invalidate (x)
                   1354:      rtx x;
                   1355: {
                   1356:   register int i;
                   1357:   register struct table_elt *p;
                   1358:   register rtx base;
                   1359:   register int start, end;
                   1360: 
                   1361:   /* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents
                   1362:      are recorded through the qty number mechanism.
                   1363:      Just change the qty number of the register,
                   1364:      mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
                   1365:      and remove it itself.  */
                   1366: 
                   1367:   if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
                   1368:     {
                   1369:       register int regno = REGNO (x);
                   1370:       register int hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
                   1371: 
                   1372:       /* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
                   1373:         that it's value might have changed.  If it is a pseudo, remove its
                   1374:         entry from the hash table.
                   1375: 
                   1376:         For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
                   1377:         additional hard registers corresponding to X.  Then, if any of these
                   1378:         registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
                   1379:         overlap these registers.  */
                   1380: 
                   1381:       delete_reg_equiv (regno);
                   1382:       reg_tick[regno]++;
                   1383: 
                   1384:       if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   1385:        remove_from_table (lookup_for_remove (x, hash, GET_MODE (x)), hash);
                   1386:       else
                   1387:        {
                   1388:          int in_table = TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
                   1389:          int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
                   1390:          int tregno, tendregno;
                   1391:          register struct table_elt *p, *next;
                   1392: 
                   1393:          CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
                   1394: 
                   1395:          for (i = regno + 1; i < endregno; i++)
                   1396:            {
                   1397:              in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
                   1398:              CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
                   1399:              delete_reg_equiv (i);
                   1400:              reg_tick[i]++;
                   1401:            }
                   1402: 
                   1403:          if (in_table)
                   1404:            for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
                   1405:              for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
                   1406:                {
                   1407:                  next = p->next_same_hash;
                   1408: 
                   1409:                  if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
                   1410:                      || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   1411:                    continue;
                   1412: 
                   1413:                  tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
                   1414:                  tendregno
                   1415:                    = tregno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (tregno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
                   1416:                  if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
                   1417:                  remove_from_table (p, hash);
                   1418:                }
                   1419:        }
                   1420: 
                   1421:       return;
                   1422:     }
                   1423: 
                   1424:   if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
                   1425:     {
                   1426:       if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != REG)
                   1427:        abort ();
                   1428:       invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x));
                   1429:       return;
                   1430:     }
                   1431: 
                   1432:   /* X is not a register; it must be a memory reference with
                   1433:      a nonvarying address.  Remove all hash table elements
                   1434:      that refer to overlapping pieces of memory.  */
                   1435: 
                   1436:   if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
                   1437:     abort ();
                   1438:   base = XEXP (x, 0);
                   1439:   start = 0;
                   1440: 
                   1441:   /* Registers with nonvarying addresses usually have constant equivalents;
                   1442:      but the frame pointer register is also possible.  */
                   1443:   if (GET_CODE (base) == REG
                   1444:       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (base))
                   1445:       && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] == GET_MODE (base)
                   1446:       && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] != 0)
                   1447:     base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]];
                   1448:   else if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
                   1449:           && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT
                   1450:           && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 0)) == REG
                   1451:           && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (base, 0)))
                   1452:           && (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]]
                   1453:               == GET_MODE (XEXP (base, 0)))
                   1454:           && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]])
                   1455:     {
                   1456:       start = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
                   1457:       base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]];
                   1458:     }
                   1459: 
                   1460:   if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
                   1461:     base = XEXP (base, 0);
                   1462:   if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
                   1463:       && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   1464:     {
                   1465:       start += INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
                   1466:       base = XEXP (base, 0);
                   1467:     }
                   1468: 
                   1469:   end = start + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
                   1470:   for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
                   1471:     {
                   1472:       register struct table_elt *next;
                   1473:       for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
                   1474:        {
                   1475:          next = p->next_same_hash;
                   1476:          if (refers_to_mem_p (p->exp, base, start, end))
                   1477:            remove_from_table (p, i);
                   1478:        }
                   1479:     }
                   1480: }
                   1481: 
                   1482: /* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
                   1483:    since they are already invalid, and we are about to
                   1484:    mark that register valid again and don't want the old
                   1485:    expressions to reappear as valid.  */
                   1486: 
                   1487: static void
                   1488: remove_invalid_refs (regno)
                   1489:      int regno;
                   1490: {
                   1491:   register int i;
                   1492:   register struct table_elt *p, *next;
                   1493: 
                   1494:   for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
                   1495:     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
                   1496:       {
                   1497:        next = p->next_same_hash;
                   1498:        if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
                   1499:            && refers_to_regno_p (regno, regno + 1, p->exp, 0))
                   1500:          remove_from_table (p, i);
                   1501:       }
                   1502: }
                   1503: 
                   1504: /* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
                   1505:    reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
                   1506: 
                   1507:    This is called when we make a jump equivalence.  */
                   1508: 
                   1509: static void
                   1510: rehash_using_reg (x)
                   1511:      rtx x;
                   1512: {
                   1513:   int i;
                   1514:   struct table_elt *p, *next;
                   1515:   int hash;
                   1516: 
                   1517:   if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
                   1518:     x = SUBREG_REG (x);
                   1519: 
                   1520:   /* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
                   1521:      valid entries in the table, we have no work to do.  */
                   1522: 
                   1523:   if (GET_CODE (x) != REG
                   1524:       || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] < 0
                   1525:       || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] != reg_tick[REGNO (x)])
                   1526:     return;
                   1527: 
                   1528:   /* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
                   1529:      If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it.  We can skip
                   1530:      objects that are registers, since they are handled specially.  */
                   1531: 
                   1532:   for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
                   1533:     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
                   1534:       {
                   1535:        next = p->next_same_hash;
                   1536:        if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG && reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
1.1.1.2 ! root     1537:            && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)
1.1       root     1538:            && i != (hash = safe_hash (p->exp, p->mode) % NBUCKETS))
                   1539:          {
                   1540:            if (p->next_same_hash)
                   1541:              p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
                   1542: 
                   1543:            if (p->prev_same_hash)
                   1544:              p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
                   1545:            else
                   1546:              table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
                   1547: 
                   1548:            p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
                   1549:            p->prev_same_hash = 0;
                   1550:            if (table[hash])
                   1551:              table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
                   1552:            table[hash] = p;
                   1553:          }
                   1554:       }
                   1555: }
                   1556: 
                   1557: /* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory,
                   1558:    or some of them as specified by *WRITES.  */
                   1559: 
                   1560: static void
                   1561: invalidate_memory (writes)
                   1562:      struct write_data *writes;
                   1563: {
                   1564:   register int i;
                   1565:   register struct table_elt *p, *next;
                   1566:   int all = writes->all;
                   1567:   int nonscalar = writes->nonscalar;
                   1568: 
                   1569:   for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
                   1570:     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
                   1571:       {
                   1572:        next = p->next_same_hash;
                   1573:        if (p->in_memory
                   1574:            && (all
                   1575:                || (nonscalar && p->in_struct)
                   1576:                || cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (p->exp)))
                   1577:          remove_from_table (p, i);
                   1578:       }
                   1579: }
                   1580: 
                   1581: /* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
                   1582:    register.  Also update their TICK values.  */
                   1583: 
                   1584: static void
                   1585: invalidate_for_call ()
                   1586: {
                   1587:   int regno, endregno;
                   1588:   int i;
                   1589:   int hash;
                   1590:   struct table_elt *p, *next;
                   1591:   int in_table = 0;
                   1592: 
                   1593:   /* Go through all the hard registers.  For each that is clobbered in
                   1594:      a CALL_INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
                   1595:      reg_tick if defined.  Also see if any of these registers is currently
                   1596:      in the table.  */
                   1597: 
                   1598:   for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; regno++)
                   1599:     if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, regno))
                   1600:       {
                   1601:        delete_reg_equiv (regno);
                   1602:        if (reg_tick[regno] >= 0)
                   1603:          reg_tick[regno]++;
                   1604: 
                   1605:        in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
                   1606:       }
                   1607: 
                   1608:   /* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
                   1609:      table, we are done.  Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
                   1610:      entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register.  */
                   1611: 
                   1612:   if (in_table)
                   1613:     for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
                   1614:       for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
                   1615:        {
                   1616:          next = p->next_same_hash;
                   1617: 
                   1618:          if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
                   1619:              || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   1620:            continue;
                   1621: 
                   1622:          regno = REGNO (p->exp);
                   1623:          endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
                   1624: 
                   1625:          for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
                   1626:            if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i))
                   1627:              {
                   1628:                remove_from_table (p, hash);
                   1629:                break;
                   1630:              }
                   1631:        }
                   1632: }
                   1633: 
                   1634: /* Given an expression X of type CONST,
                   1635:    and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
                   1636:    is not in the hash table),
                   1637:    return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
                   1638:    If none can be found, return 0.  */
                   1639: 
                   1640: static rtx
                   1641: use_related_value (x, elt)
                   1642:      rtx x;
                   1643:      struct table_elt *elt;
                   1644: {
                   1645:   register struct table_elt *relt = 0;
                   1646:   register struct table_elt *p, *q;
                   1647:   int offset;
                   1648: 
                   1649:   /* First, is there anything related known?
                   1650:      If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
                   1651:      Otherwise, must look it up.  */
                   1652: 
                   1653:   if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
                   1654:     relt = elt;
                   1655:   else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
                   1656:     {
                   1657:       rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
                   1658:       if (subexp != 0)
                   1659:        relt = lookup (subexp,
                   1660:                       safe_hash (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)) % NBUCKETS,
                   1661:                       GET_MODE (subexp));
                   1662:     }
                   1663: 
                   1664:   if (relt == 0)
                   1665:     return 0;
                   1666: 
                   1667:   /* Search all related table entries for one that has an
                   1668:      equivalent register.  */
                   1669: 
                   1670:   p = relt;
                   1671:   while (1)
                   1672:     {
                   1673:       /* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
                   1674:         The first is when X is already in the table.  Then it is searching
                   1675:         the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT).  The second case is when
                   1676:         X is not in the table.  Then RELT points to a class for the related
                   1677:         value.
                   1678: 
                   1679:         Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
                   1680:         the same value as X.  */
                   1681: 
                   1682:       if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
                   1683:        q = 0;
                   1684:       else
                   1685:        for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
                   1686:          if (GET_CODE (q->exp) == REG)
                   1687:            break;
                   1688: 
                   1689:       if (q)
                   1690:        break;
                   1691: 
                   1692:       p = p->related_value;
                   1693: 
                   1694:       /* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
                   1695:         Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
                   1696:         and it has no related values recorded.  */
                   1697:       if (p == relt || p == 0)
                   1698:        break;
                   1699:     }
                   1700: 
                   1701:   if (q == 0)
                   1702:     return 0;
                   1703: 
                   1704:   offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
                   1705:   /* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity.  */
                   1706:   return plus_constant (q->exp, offset);
                   1707: }
                   1708: 
                   1709: /* Hash an rtx.  We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
                   1710:    Equivalent registers hash identically.
                   1711:    MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
                   1712:    otherwise the mode of X is used.
                   1713: 
                   1714:    Store 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
                   1715: 
                   1716:    Store 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a MEM rtx
                   1717:    which does not have the RTX_UNCHANGING_P bit set.
                   1718:    In this case, also store 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
                   1719:    if there is a MEM rtx which has the MEM_IN_STRUCT_P bit set.
                   1720: 
                   1721:    Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
                   1722:    is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address.  */
                   1723: 
                   1724: static int
                   1725: canon_hash (x, mode)
                   1726:      rtx x;
                   1727:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1728: {
                   1729:   register int i, j;
                   1730:   register int hash = 0;
                   1731:   register enum rtx_code code;
                   1732:   register char *fmt;
                   1733: 
                   1734:   /* repeat is used to turn tail-recursion into iteration.  */
                   1735:  repeat:
                   1736:   if (x == 0)
                   1737:     return hash;
                   1738: 
                   1739:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                   1740:   switch (code)
                   1741:     {
                   1742:     case REG:
                   1743:       {
                   1744:        register int regno = REGNO (x);
                   1745: 
                   1746:        /* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
                   1747:           because extending its life will cause reload problems.  We
                   1748:           consider ap, fp, and sp to be fixed for this purpose.
                   1749:           On all machines, we can't record any global registers. */
                   1750: 
                   1751:        if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   1752:            && (global_regs[regno]
                   1753: #ifdef SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
                   1754:                || (! fixed_regs[regno]
                   1755:                    && regno != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
                   1756:                    && regno != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
                   1757:                    && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
                   1758: #endif
                   1759:                ))
                   1760:          {
                   1761:            do_not_record = 1;
                   1762:            return 0;
                   1763:          }
                   1764:        return hash + ((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[regno];
                   1765:       }
                   1766: 
                   1767:     case CONST_INT:
                   1768:       hash += ((int) mode + ((int) CONST_INT << 7)
                   1769:               + INTVAL (x) + (INTVAL (x) >> HASHBITS));
                   1770:       return ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & hash;
                   1771: 
                   1772:     case CONST_DOUBLE:
                   1773:       /* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
                   1774:         the integers representing the constant.  */
                   1775:       hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
                   1776:       {
                   1777:        int i;
                   1778:        for (i = 2; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (CONST_DOUBLE); i++)
                   1779:          {
                   1780:            int tem = XINT (x, i);
                   1781:            hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
                   1782:          }
                   1783:       }
                   1784:       return hash;
                   1785: 
                   1786:       /* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label.  */
                   1787:     case LABEL_REF:
                   1788:       /* Use `and' to ensure a positive number.  */
                   1789:       return (hash + ((int) LABEL_REF << 7)
                   1790:              + ((int) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
                   1791: 
                   1792:     case SYMBOL_REF:
                   1793:       return (hash + ((int) SYMBOL_REF << 7)
                   1794:              + ((int) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
                   1795: 
                   1796:     case MEM:
                   1797:       if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
                   1798:        {
                   1799:          do_not_record = 1;
                   1800:          return 0;
                   1801:        }
                   1802:       if (! RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x))
                   1803:        {
                   1804:          hash_arg_in_memory = 1;
                   1805:          if (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x)) hash_arg_in_struct = 1;
                   1806:        }
                   1807:       /* Now that we have already found this special case,
                   1808:         might as well speed it up as much as possible.  */
                   1809:       hash += (int) MEM;
                   1810:       x = XEXP (x, 0);
                   1811:       goto repeat;
                   1812: 
                   1813:     case PRE_DEC:
                   1814:     case PRE_INC:
                   1815:     case POST_DEC:
                   1816:     case POST_INC:
                   1817:     case PC:
                   1818:     case CC0:
                   1819:     case CALL:
                   1820:     case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
                   1821:       do_not_record = 1;
                   1822:       return 0;
                   1823: 
                   1824:     case ASM_OPERANDS:
                   1825:       if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
                   1826:        {
                   1827:          do_not_record = 1;
                   1828:          return 0;
                   1829:        }
                   1830:     }
                   1831: 
                   1832:   i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
                   1833:   hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
                   1834:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   1835:   for (; i >= 0; i--)
                   1836:     {
                   1837:       if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   1838:        {
                   1839:          rtx tem = XEXP (x, i);
                   1840:          rtx tem1;
                   1841: 
                   1842:          /* If the operand is a REG that is equivalent to a constant, hash
                   1843:             as if we were hashing the constant, since we will be comparing
                   1844:             that way.  */
                   1845:          if (tem != 0 && GET_CODE (tem) == REG
                   1846:              && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (tem))
                   1847:              && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]] == GET_MODE (tem)
                   1848:              && (tem1 = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]]) != 0
                   1849:              && CONSTANT_P (tem1))
                   1850:            tem = tem1;
                   1851: 
                   1852:          /* If we are about to do the last recursive call
                   1853:             needed at this level, change it into iteration.
                   1854:             This function  is called enough to be worth it.  */
                   1855:          if (i == 0)
                   1856:            {
                   1857:              x = tem;
                   1858:              goto repeat;
                   1859:            }
                   1860:          hash += canon_hash (tem, 0);
                   1861:        }
                   1862:       else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   1863:        for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                   1864:          hash += canon_hash (XVECEXP (x, i, j), 0);
                   1865:       else if (fmt[i] == 's')
                   1866:        {
                   1867:          register char *p = XSTR (x, i);
                   1868:          if (p)
                   1869:            while (*p)
                   1870:              {
                   1871:                register int tem = *p++;
                   1872:                hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
                   1873:              }
                   1874:        }
                   1875:       else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
                   1876:        {
                   1877:          register int tem = XINT (x, i);
                   1878:          hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
                   1879:        }
                   1880:       else
                   1881:        abort ();
                   1882:     }
                   1883:   return hash;
                   1884: }
                   1885: 
                   1886: /* Like canon_hash but with no side effects.  */
                   1887: 
                   1888: static int
                   1889: safe_hash (x, mode)
                   1890:      rtx x;
                   1891:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1892: {
                   1893:   int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
                   1894:   int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   1895:   int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   1896:   int hash = canon_hash (x, mode);
                   1897:   hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
                   1898:   hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
                   1899:   do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
                   1900:   return hash;
                   1901: }
                   1902: 
                   1903: /* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
                   1904:    without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
                   1905:    If VALIDATE is nonzero,
                   1906:    we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
                   1907:    and Y was found in the hash table.  We check register refs
                   1908:    in Y for being marked as valid.
                   1909: 
                   1910:    If EQUAL_VALUES is nonzero, we allow a register to match a constant value
                   1911:    that is known to be in the register.  Ordinarily, we don't allow them
                   1912:    to match, because letting them match would cause unpredictable results
                   1913:    in all the places that search a hash table chain for an equivalent
                   1914:    for a given value.  A possible equivalent that has different structure
                   1915:    has its hash code computed from different data.  Whether the hash code
                   1916:    is the same as that of the the given value is pure luck.  */
                   1917: 
                   1918: static int
                   1919: exp_equiv_p (x, y, validate, equal_values)
                   1920:      rtx x, y;
                   1921:      int validate;
                   1922:      int equal_values;
                   1923: {
                   1924:   register int i;
                   1925:   register enum rtx_code code;
                   1926:   register char *fmt;
                   1927: 
                   1928:   /* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
                   1929:      if VALIDATE is nonzero.  */
                   1930:   if (x == y && !validate)
                   1931:     return 1;
                   1932:   if (x == 0 || y == 0)
                   1933:     return x == y;
                   1934: 
                   1935:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                   1936:   if (code != GET_CODE (y))
                   1937:     {
                   1938:       if (!equal_values)
                   1939:        return 0;
                   1940: 
                   1941:       /* If X is a constant and Y is a register or vice versa, they may be
                   1942:         equivalent.  We only have to validate if Y is a register.  */
                   1943:       if (CONSTANT_P (x) && GET_CODE (y) == REG
                   1944:          && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (y))
                   1945:          && GET_MODE (y) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]]
                   1946:          && rtx_equal_p (x, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]])
                   1947:          && (! validate || reg_in_table[REGNO (y)] == reg_tick[REGNO (y)]))
                   1948:        return 1;
                   1949: 
                   1950:       if (CONSTANT_P (y) && code == REG
                   1951:          && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
                   1952:          && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
                   1953:          && rtx_equal_p (y, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]))
                   1954:        return 1;
                   1955: 
                   1956:       return 0;
                   1957:     }
                   1958: 
                   1959:   /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent.  */
                   1960:   if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
                   1961:     return 0;
                   1962: 
                   1963:   switch (code)
                   1964:     {
                   1965:     case PC:
                   1966:     case CC0:
                   1967:       return x == y;
                   1968: 
                   1969:     case CONST_INT:
                   1970:       return XINT (x, 0) == XINT (y, 0);
                   1971: 
                   1972:     case LABEL_REF:
                   1973:     case SYMBOL_REF:
                   1974:       return XEXP (x, 0) == XEXP (y, 0);
                   1975: 
                   1976:     case REG:
                   1977:       {
                   1978:        int regno = REGNO (y);
                   1979:        int endregno
                   1980:          = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
                   1981:                     : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (y)));
                   1982:        int i;
                   1983: 
                   1984:        /* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
                   1985:           equivalent.  If there are and we are not to validate, they
                   1986:           are equivalent.  Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date.  */
                   1987: 
                   1988:        if (reg_qty[REGNO (x)] != reg_qty[regno])
                   1989:          return 0;
                   1990: 
                   1991:        if (! validate)
                   1992:          return 1;
                   1993: 
                   1994:        for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
                   1995:          if (reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
                   1996:            return 0;
                   1997: 
                   1998:        return 1;
                   1999:       }
                   2000: 
                   2001:     /*  For commutative operations, check both orders.  */
                   2002:     case PLUS:
                   2003:     case MULT:
                   2004:     case AND:
                   2005:     case IOR:
                   2006:     case XOR:
                   2007:     case NE:
                   2008:     case EQ:
                   2009:       return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0), validate, equal_values)
                   2010:               && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
                   2011:                               validate, equal_values))
                   2012:              || (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
                   2013:                               validate, equal_values)
                   2014:                  && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
                   2015:                                  validate, equal_values)));
                   2016:     }
                   2017: 
                   2018:   /* Compare the elements.  If any pair of corresponding elements
                   2019:      fail to match, return 0 for the whole things.  */
                   2020: 
                   2021:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   2022:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   2023:     {
                   2024:       if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   2025:        {
                   2026:          if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i), validate, equal_values))
                   2027:            return 0;
                   2028:        }
                   2029:       else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   2030:        {
                   2031:          int j;
                   2032:          if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
                   2033:            return 0;
                   2034:          for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                   2035:            if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
                   2036:                               validate, equal_values))
                   2037:              return 0;
                   2038:        }
                   2039:       else if (fmt[i] == 's')
                   2040:        {
                   2041:          if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
                   2042:            return 0;
                   2043:        }
                   2044:       else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
                   2045:        {
                   2046:          if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
                   2047:            return 0;
                   2048:        }
                   2049:       else if (fmt[i] != '0')
                   2050:        abort ();
                   2051:     }
                   2052:   return 1;
                   2053: }
                   2054: 
                   2055: /* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X matches Y.
                   2056:    Here we do not require that X or Y be valid (for registers referred to)
                   2057:    for being in the hash table.  */
                   2058: 
                   2059: int
                   2060: refers_to_p (x, y)
                   2061:      rtx x, y;
                   2062: {
                   2063:   register int i;
                   2064:   register enum rtx_code code;
                   2065:   register char *fmt;
                   2066: 
                   2067:  repeat:
                   2068:   if (x == y)
                   2069:     return 1;
                   2070:   if (x == 0 || y == 0)
                   2071:     return 0;
                   2072: 
                   2073:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                   2074:   /* If X as a whole has the same code as Y, they may match.
                   2075:      If so, return 1.  */
                   2076:   if (code == GET_CODE (y))
                   2077:     {
                   2078:       if (exp_equiv_p (x, y, 0, 1))
                   2079:        return 1;
                   2080:     }
                   2081: 
                   2082:   /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions.  */
                   2083: 
                   2084:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   2085:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   2086:     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   2087:       {
                   2088:        if (i == 0)
                   2089:          {
                   2090:            x = XEXP (x, 0);
                   2091:            goto repeat;
                   2092:          }
                   2093:        else
                   2094:          if (refers_to_p (XEXP (x, i), y))
                   2095:            return 1;
                   2096:       }
                   2097:     else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   2098:       {
                   2099:        int j;
                   2100:        for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                   2101:          if (refers_to_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), y))
                   2102:            return 1;
                   2103:       }
                   2104: 
                   2105:   return 0;
                   2106: }
                   2107: 
                   2108: /* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X refers to memory
                   2109:    at an address of BASE plus some offset
                   2110:    such that any of the bytes' offsets fall between START (inclusive)
                   2111:    and END (exclusive).
                   2112: 
                   2113:    The value is undefined if X is a varying address.
                   2114:    This function is not used in such cases.
                   2115: 
                   2116:    When used in the cse pass, `qty_const' is nonzero, and it is used
                   2117:    to treat an address that is a register with a known constant value
                   2118:    as if it were that constant value.
                   2119:    In the loop pass, `qty_const' is zero, so this is not done.  */
                   2120: 
                   2121: int
                   2122: refers_to_mem_p (x, base, start, end)
                   2123:      rtx x, base;
                   2124:      int start, end;
                   2125: {
                   2126:   register int i;
                   2127:   register enum rtx_code code;
                   2128:   register char *fmt;
                   2129: 
                   2130:   if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST_INT)
                   2131:     {
                   2132:       start += INTVAL (base);
                   2133:       end += INTVAL (base);
                   2134:       base = const0_rtx;
                   2135:     }
                   2136: 
                   2137:  repeat:
                   2138:   if (x == 0)
                   2139:     return 0;
                   2140: 
                   2141:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                   2142:   if (code == MEM)
                   2143:     {
                   2144:       register rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0); /* Get the address.  */
                   2145:       int myend;
                   2146: 
                   2147:       i = 0;
                   2148:       if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
                   2149:          /* qty_const is 0 when outside the cse pass;
                   2150:             at such times, this info is not available.  */
                   2151:          && qty_const != 0
                   2152:          && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
                   2153:          && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
                   2154:          && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
                   2155:        addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
                   2156:       else if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
                   2157:               && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
                   2158:               && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
                   2159:               && qty_const != 0
                   2160:               && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)))
                   2161:               && (GET_MODE (XEXP (addr, 0))
                   2162:                   == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]])
                   2163:               && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]])
                   2164:        {
                   2165:          i = INTVAL (XEXP (addr, 1));
                   2166:          addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]];
                   2167:        }
                   2168: 
                   2169:     check_addr:
                   2170:       if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST)
                   2171:        addr = XEXP (addr, 0);
                   2172: 
                   2173:       /* If ADDR is BASE, or BASE plus an integer, put
                   2174:         the integer in I.  */
                   2175:       if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
                   2176:          && XEXP (addr, 0) == base
                   2177:          && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   2178:        i += INTVAL (XEXP (addr, 1));
                   2179:       else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM)
                   2180:        {
                   2181:          if (GET_CODE (base) != LO_SUM)
                   2182:            return 1;
                   2183:          /* The REG component of the LO_SUM is known by the
                   2184:             const value in the XEXP part.  */
                   2185:          addr = XEXP (addr, 1);
                   2186:          base = XEXP (base, 1);
                   2187:          i = 0;
                   2188:          if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
                   2189:            base = XEXP (base, 0);
                   2190:          if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
                   2191:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   2192:            {
                   2193:              int tem = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
                   2194:              start += tem;
                   2195:              end += tem;
                   2196:              base = XEXP (base, 0);
                   2197:            }
                   2198:          goto check_addr;
                   2199:        }
                   2200:       else if (GET_CODE (base) == LO_SUM)
                   2201:        {
                   2202:          base = XEXP (base, 1);
                   2203:          if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
                   2204:            base = XEXP (base, 0);
                   2205:          if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
                   2206:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   2207:            {
                   2208:              int tem = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
                   2209:              start += tem;
                   2210:              end += tem;
                   2211:              base = XEXP (base, 0);
                   2212:            }
                   2213:          goto check_addr;        
                   2214:        }
                   2215:       else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST_INT && base == const0_rtx)
                   2216:        i = INTVAL (addr);
                   2217:       else if (addr != base)
                   2218:        return 0;
                   2219: 
                   2220:       myend = i + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
                   2221:       return myend > start && i < end;
                   2222:     }
                   2223: 
                   2224:   /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions.  */
                   2225: 
                   2226:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   2227:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   2228:     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   2229:       {
                   2230:        if (i == 0)
                   2231:          {
                   2232:            x = XEXP (x, 0);
                   2233:            goto repeat;
                   2234:          }
                   2235:        else
                   2236:          if (refers_to_mem_p (XEXP (x, i), base, start, end))
                   2237:            return 1;
                   2238:       }
                   2239:     else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   2240:       {
                   2241:        int j;
                   2242:        for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                   2243:          if (refers_to_mem_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), base, start, end))
                   2244:            return 1;
                   2245:       }
                   2246: 
                   2247:   return 0;
                   2248: }
                   2249: 
                   2250: /* Nonzero if X refers to memory at a varying address;
                   2251:    except that a register which has at the moment a known constant value
                   2252:    isn't considered variable.  */
                   2253: 
                   2254: static int
                   2255: cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (x)
                   2256:      rtx x;
                   2257: {
                   2258:   /* We need not check for X and the equivalence class being of the same
                   2259:      mode because if X is equivalent to a constant in some mode, it
                   2260:      doesn't vary in any mode.  */
                   2261: 
                   2262:   if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
                   2263:       && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
                   2264:       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)))
                   2265:       && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]]
                   2266:       && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]] != 0)
                   2267:     return 0;
                   2268: 
                   2269:   if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
                   2270:       && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
                   2271:       && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
                   2272:       && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == REG
                   2273:       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
                   2274:       && (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
                   2275:          == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
                   2276:       && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
                   2277:     return 0;
                   2278: 
                   2279:   return rtx_addr_varies_p (x);
                   2280: }
                   2281: 
                   2282: /* Canonicalize an expression:
                   2283:    replace each register reference inside it
                   2284:    with the "oldest" equivalent register.
                   2285: 
                   2286:    If INSN is non-zero and we are replacing a pseudo with a hard register
                   2287:    or vice versa, verify that INSN remains valid after we make our
                   2288:    substitution.  */
                   2289: 
                   2290: static rtx
                   2291: canon_reg (x, insn)
                   2292:      rtx x;
                   2293:      rtx insn;
                   2294: {
                   2295:   register int i;
                   2296:   register enum rtx_code code;
                   2297:   register char *fmt;
                   2298: 
                   2299:   if (x == 0)
                   2300:     return x;
                   2301: 
                   2302:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                   2303:   switch (code)
                   2304:     {
                   2305:     case PC:
                   2306:     case CC0:
                   2307:     case CONST:
                   2308:     case CONST_INT:
                   2309:     case CONST_DOUBLE:
                   2310:     case SYMBOL_REF:
                   2311:     case LABEL_REF:
                   2312:     case ADDR_VEC:
                   2313:     case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
                   2314:       return x;
                   2315: 
                   2316:     case REG:
                   2317:       {
                   2318:        register int first;
                   2319: 
                   2320:        /* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
                   2321:           in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
                   2322:           of each occurrence.  Also, some hard regs appear in
                   2323:           MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered.  Don't try to
                   2324:           replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS.  */
                   2325:        if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   2326:            || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
                   2327:          return x;
                   2328: 
                   2329:        first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]];
                   2330:        return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
                   2331:                : REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
                   2332:                : gen_rtx (REG, qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]], first));
                   2333:       }
                   2334:     }
                   2335: 
                   2336:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   2337:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   2338:     {
                   2339:       register int j;
                   2340: 
                   2341:       if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   2342:        {
                   2343:          rtx new = canon_reg (XEXP (x, i), insn);
                   2344: 
                   2345:          /* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
                   2346:             insn remains valid.  */
                   2347:          if (new && GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, i)) == REG
                   2348:              && ((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2349:                  != (REGNO (XEXP (x, i)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
                   2350:            validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), new, 0);
                   2351:          else
                   2352:            XEXP (x, i) = new;
                   2353:        }
                   2354:       else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   2355:        for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                   2356:          XVECEXP (x, i, j) = canon_reg (XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
                   2357:     }
                   2358: 
                   2359:   return x;
                   2360: }
                   2361: 
                   2362: /* LOC is a location with INSN that is an operand address (the contents of
                   2363:    a MEM).  Find the best equivalent address to use that is valid for this
                   2364:    insn.
                   2365: 
                   2366:    On most CISC machines, complicated address modes are costly, and rtx_cost
                   2367:    is a good approximation for that cost.  However, most RISC machines have
                   2368:    only a few (usually only one) memory reference formats.  If an address is
                   2369:    valid at all, it is often just as cheap as any other address.  Hence, for
                   2370:    RISC machines, we use the configuration macro `ADDRESS_COST' to compare the
                   2371:    costs of various addresses.  For two addresses of equal cost, choose the one
                   2372:    with the highest `rtx_cost' value as that has the potential of eliminating
                   2373:    the most insns.  For equal costs, we choose the first in the equivalence
                   2374:    class.  Note that we ignore the fact that pseudo registers are cheaper
                   2375:    than hard registers here because we would also prefer the pseudo registers.
                   2376:   */
                   2377: 
                   2378: void
                   2379: find_best_addr (insn, loc)
                   2380:      rtx insn;
                   2381:      rtx *loc;
                   2382: {
                   2383:   struct table_elt *elt, *p;
                   2384:   rtx addr = *loc;
                   2385:   int our_cost;
                   2386:   int found_better = 1;
                   2387:   int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
                   2388:   int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   2389:   int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   2390:   int hash_code;
                   2391:   int addr_volatile;
                   2392:   int regno;
                   2393: 
                   2394:   /* Do not try to replace constant addresses or addresses of local and
                   2395:      argument slots.  These MEM expressions are made only once and inserted
                   2396:      in many instructions, as well as being used to control symbol table
                   2397:      output.  It is not safe to clobber them.
                   2398: 
                   2399:      There are some uncommon cases where the address is already in a register
                   2400:      for some reason, but we cannot take advantage of that because we have
                   2401:      no easy way to unshare the MEM.  In addition, looking up all stack
                   2402:      addresses is costly.  */
                   2403:   if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
                   2404:        && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
                   2405:        && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
                   2406:        && (regno = REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)),
                   2407:           regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
                   2408:       || (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
                   2409:          && (regno = REGNO (addr),
                   2410:              regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
                   2411:       || CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr))
                   2412:     return;
                   2413: 
                   2414:   /* If this address is not simply a register, try to fold it.  This will
                   2415:      sometimes simplify the expression.  Many simplifications
                   2416:      will not be valid, but some, usually applying the associative rule, will
                   2417:      be valid and produce better code.  */
                   2418:   if (GET_CODE (addr) != REG
                   2419:       && validate_change (insn, loc, fold_rtx (addr, insn), 0))
                   2420:     addr = *loc;
                   2421:        
                   2422:   /* If this address is not in the hash table, we can't do any better.
                   2423:      Also, ignore if volatile.  */
                   2424:   do_not_record = 0;
                   2425:   hash_code = HASH (addr, Pmode);
                   2426:   addr_volatile = do_not_record;
                   2427:   do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
                   2428:   hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
                   2429:   hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
                   2430: 
                   2431:   if (addr_volatile)
                   2432:     return;
                   2433: 
                   2434:   elt = lookup (addr, hash_code, Pmode);
                   2435: 
                   2436:   if (elt == 0)
                   2437:     return;
                   2438: 
                   2439: #ifndef ADDRESS_COST
                   2440:   our_cost = elt->cost;
                   2441: 
                   2442:   /* Find the lowest cost below ours that works.  */
                   2443:   for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
                   2444:     if (elt->cost < our_cost
                   2445:        && (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
                   2446:        && validate_change (insn, loc, canon_reg (copy_rtx (elt->exp), 0), 0))
                   2447:       return;
                   2448: 
                   2449: #else
                   2450: 
                   2451:   /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry in
                   2452:      the class that is valid.  We use the `flag' field to indicate choices
                   2453:      that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better one that
                   2454:      hasn't already been tried.  */
                   2455: 
                   2456:   for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   2457:     p->flag = 0;
                   2458: 
                   2459:   while (found_better)
                   2460:     {
                   2461:       int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
                   2462:       int best_rtx_cost = (elt->cost + 1) >> 1;
                   2463:       struct table_elt *best_elt = elt; 
                   2464: 
                   2465:       found_better = 0;
                   2466:       for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   2467:        if (! p->flag
                   2468:            && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
                   2469:            && (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) < best_addr_cost
                   2470:                || (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) == best_addr_cost
                   2471:                    && (p->cost + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
                   2472:          {
                   2473:            found_better = 1;
                   2474:            best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (p->exp);
                   2475:            best_rtx_cost = (p->cost + 1) >> 1;
                   2476:            best_elt = p;
                   2477:          }
                   2478: 
                   2479:       if (found_better)
                   2480:        {
                   2481:          if (validate_change (insn, loc,
                   2482:                               canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_elt->exp), 0), 0))
                   2483:            return;
                   2484:          else
                   2485:            best_elt->flag = 1;
                   2486:        }
                   2487:     }
                   2488: #endif
                   2489: }
                   2490: 
                   2491: /* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
                   2492:    operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
                   2493:    what values are being compared.
                   2494: 
                   2495:    *PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
                   2496:    actually being compared.  For example, if *PARG1 was (cc0) and *PARG2
                   2497:    was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that were
                   2498:    compared to produce cc0.
                   2499: 
                   2500:    The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
                   2501:    A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison.  */
                   2502: 
                   2503: static enum rtx_code
                   2504: find_comparison_args (code, parg1, parg2)
                   2505:      enum rtx_code code;
                   2506:      rtx *parg1, *parg2;
                   2507: {
                   2508:   rtx arg1, arg2;
                   2509: 
                   2510:   arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
                   2511: 
                   2512:   /* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to.  */
                   2513: 
                   2514:   while (arg2 == const0_rtx)
                   2515:     {
                   2516:       /* Set non-zero when we find something of interest.  */
                   2517:       rtx x = 0;
                   2518:       int reverse_code = 0;
                   2519:       struct table_elt *p = 0;
                   2520: 
                   2521:       /* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it.
                   2522:         On machines with CC0, this is the only case that can occur, since
                   2523:         fold_rtx will return the COMPARE or item being compared with zero
                   2524:         when given CC0.  */
                   2525: 
                   2526:       if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
                   2527:        x = arg1;
                   2528: 
                   2529:       /* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
                   2530:         STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments.  */
                   2531: 
                   2532:       else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (arg1)) == '<')
                   2533:        {
                   2534:          if (code == NE || (code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1))
                   2535:            x = arg1;
                   2536:          else if (code == EQ || (code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1))
                   2537:            x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
                   2538:        }
                   2539: 
                   2540:       /* ??? We could also check for
                   2541: 
                   2542:         (ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
                   2543: 
                   2544:         and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring.  */
                   2545: 
                   2546:       if (x == 0)
                   2547:        /* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
                   2548:           that lets us see what is being compared.  */
                   2549:        p = lookup (arg1, safe_hash (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)) % NBUCKETS,
                   2550:                    GET_MODE (arg1));
                   2551:       if (p) p = p->first_same_value;
                   2552: 
                   2553:       for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   2554:        {
                   2555:          enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
                   2556: 
                   2557:          /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it.  */
                   2558:          if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
                   2559:            continue;
                   2560: 
                   2561:          if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
                   2562:              /* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
                   2563:                 that includes the comparison code.  In that case, ARG1 would
                   2564:                 be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
                   2565:                 either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero.  If this is an NE operation,
                   2566:                 ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
                   2567:                 we must reverse ORIG_CODE.  On machine with a negative value
                   2568:                 for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations.  */
                   2569:              || ((code == NE
                   2570:                   || (code == LT
                   2571:                       && inner_mode != VOIDmode
                   2572:                       && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   2573:                       && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
                   2574:                           & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1)))))
                   2575:                  && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<'))
                   2576:            {
                   2577:              x = p->exp;
                   2578:              break;
                   2579:            }
                   2580:          else if ((code == EQ
                   2581:                    || (code == GE
                   2582:                        && inner_mode != VOIDmode
                   2583:                        && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   2584:                        && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
                   2585:                            & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1)))))
                   2586:                   && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<')
                   2587:            {
                   2588:              reverse_code = 1;
                   2589:              x = p->exp;
                   2590:              break;
                   2591:            }
                   2592: 
                   2593:          /* If this is fp + constant, the equivalent is a better operand since
                   2594:             it may let us predict the value of the comparison.  */
                   2595:          else if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (p->exp))
                   2596:            {
                   2597:              arg1 = p->exp;
                   2598:              continue;
                   2599:            }
                   2600:        }
                   2601: 
                   2602:       /* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
                   2603:         Otherwise, set up for the next iteration.  */
                   2604:       if (x == 0)
                   2605:        break;
                   2606: 
                   2607:       arg1 = XEXP (x, 0),  arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
                   2608:       if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == '<')
                   2609:        code = GET_CODE (x);
                   2610: 
                   2611:       if (reverse_code)
                   2612:        code = reverse_condition (code);
                   2613:     }
                   2614: 
                   2615:   /* Return our results.  */
                   2616:   *parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
                   2617: 
                   2618:   return code;
                   2619: }
                   2620: 
                   2621: /* Try to simplify a unary operation CODE whose output mode is to be
                   2622:    MODE with input operand OP whose mode was originally OP_MODE.
                   2623:    Return zero if no simplification can be made.  */
                   2624: 
                   2625: rtx
                   2626: simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, op, op_mode)
                   2627:      enum rtx_code code;
                   2628:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   2629:      rtx op;
                   2630:      enum machine_mode op_mode;
                   2631: {
                   2632:   register int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
                   2633: 
                   2634:   /* The order of these tests is critical so that, for example, we don't
                   2635:      check the wrong mode (input vs. output) for a conversion operation,
                   2636:      such as FIX.  At some point, this should be simplified.  */
                   2637: 
                   2638: #if !defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
                   2639:   if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
                   2640:     {
                   2641:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   2642: 
                   2643: #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
                   2644:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), INTVAL (op) < 0 ? ~0 : 0);
                   2645: #else
                   2646:       d = (double) INTVAL (op);
                   2647: #endif
                   2648:       return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
                   2649:     }
                   2650:   else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
                   2651:     {
                   2652:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   2653: 
                   2654: #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
                   2655:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), 0);
                   2656: #else
                   2657:       d = (double) (unsigned int) INTVAL (op);
                   2658: #endif
                   2659:       return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
                   2660:     }
                   2661: 
                   2662:   else if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   2663:           && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
                   2664:     {
                   2665:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   2666: 
                   2667: #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
                   2668:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
                   2669: #else
                   2670:       if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) < 0)
                   2671:        {
                   2672:          d = (double) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
                   2673:          d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
                   2674:                * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
                   2675:          d += (double) (unsigned) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op));
                   2676:          d = (- d - 1.0);
                   2677:        }
                   2678:       else
                   2679:        {
                   2680:          d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
                   2681:          d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
                   2682:                * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
                   2683:          d += (double) (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
                   2684:        }
                   2685: #endif  /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
                   2686:       return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
                   2687:     }
                   2688:   else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   2689:           && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
                   2690:     {
                   2691:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   2692: 
                   2693: #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
                   2694:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_UNSIGNED_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op),
                   2695:                                    CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
                   2696: #else
                   2697:       d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
                   2698:       d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
                   2699:            * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
                   2700:       d += (double) (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
                   2701: #endif  /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
                   2702:       return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
                   2703:     }
                   2704: #endif
                   2705: 
                   2706:   else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
                   2707:           && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && width > 0)
                   2708:     {
                   2709:       register int arg0 = INTVAL (op);
                   2710:       register int val;
                   2711: 
                   2712:       switch (code)
                   2713:        {
                   2714:        case NOT:
                   2715:          val = ~ arg0;
                   2716:          break;
                   2717: 
                   2718:        case NEG:
                   2719:          val = - arg0;
                   2720:          break;
                   2721: 
                   2722:        case ABS:
                   2723:          val = (arg0 >= 0 ? arg0 : - arg0);
                   2724:          break;
                   2725: 
                   2726:        case FFS:
                   2727:          /* Don't use ffs here.  Instead, get low order bit and then its
                   2728:             number.  If arg0 is zero, this will return 0, as desired.  */
                   2729:          arg0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
                   2730:          val = exact_log2 (arg0 & (- arg0)) + 1;
                   2731:          break;
                   2732: 
                   2733:        case TRUNCATE:
                   2734:          val = arg0;
                   2735:          break;
                   2736: 
                   2737:        case ZERO_EXTEND:
                   2738:          if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
                   2739:            op_mode = mode;
                   2740:          if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   2741:            val = arg0;
                   2742:          else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   2743:            val = arg0 & ~((-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
                   2744:          else
                   2745:            return 0;
                   2746:          break;
                   2747: 
                   2748:        case SIGN_EXTEND:
                   2749:          if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
                   2750:            op_mode = mode;
                   2751:          if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   2752:            val = arg0;
                   2753:          else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   2754:            {
                   2755:              val = arg0 & ~((-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
                   2756:              if (val & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1)))
                   2757:                val -= 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
                   2758:            }
                   2759:          else
                   2760:            return 0;
                   2761:          break;
                   2762: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     2763:        case SQRT:
        !          2764:          return 0;
        !          2765: 
1.1       root     2766:        default:
                   2767:          abort ();
                   2768:        }
                   2769: 
                   2770:       /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
                   2771:         unless they and our sign bit are all one.
                   2772:         So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
                   2773:         unsigned value for this mode.  */
                   2774:       if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   2775:          && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
                   2776:        val &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   2777: 
                   2778:       return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
                   2779:     }
                   2780: 
                   2781:   /* We can do some operations on integer CONST_DOUBLEs.  Also allow
                   2782:      for a DImode operation on a CONST_INT. */
                   2783:   else if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode
                   2784:           && (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT))
                   2785:     {
                   2786:       int l1, h1, lv, hv;
                   2787: 
                   2788:       if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
                   2789:        l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
                   2790:       else
                   2791:        l1 = INTVAL (op), h1 = l1 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
                   2792: 
                   2793:       switch (code)
                   2794:        {
                   2795:        case NOT:
                   2796:          lv = ~ l1;
                   2797:          hv = ~ h1;
                   2798:          break;
                   2799: 
                   2800:        case NEG:
                   2801:          neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
                   2802:          break;
                   2803: 
                   2804:        case ABS:
                   2805:          if (h1 < 0)
                   2806:            neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
                   2807:          else
                   2808:            lv = l1, hv = h1;
                   2809:          break;
                   2810: 
                   2811:        case FFS:
                   2812:          hv = 0;
                   2813:          if (l1 == 0)
                   2814:            lv = HOST_BITS_PER_INT + exact_log2 (h1 & (-h1)) + 1;
                   2815:          else
                   2816:            lv = exact_log2 (l1 & (-l1)) + 1;
                   2817:          break;
                   2818: 
                   2819:        case TRUNCATE:
                   2820:          if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   2821:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode));
                   2822:          else
                   2823:            return 0;
                   2824:          break;
                   2825: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     2826:        case SQRT:
        !          2827:          return 0;
        !          2828: 
1.1       root     2829:        default:
                   2830:          return 0;
                   2831:        }
                   2832: 
                   2833:       return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
                   2834:     }
                   2835: 
                   2836: #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
                   2837:   else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   2838:           && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
                   2839:     {
                   2840:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   2841:       jmp_buf handler;
                   2842:       rtx x;
                   2843: 
                   2844:       if (setjmp (handler))
                   2845:        /* There used to be a warning here, but that is inadvisable.
                   2846:           People may want to cause traps, and the natural way
                   2847:           to do it should not get a warning.  */
                   2848:        return 0;
                   2849: 
                   2850:       set_float_handler (handler);
                   2851: 
                   2852:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
                   2853: 
                   2854:       switch (code)
                   2855:        {
                   2856:        case NEG:
                   2857:          d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
                   2858:          break;
                   2859: 
                   2860:        case ABS:
                   2861:          if (REAL_VALUES_LESS (d, 0.0))
                   2862:            d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
                   2863:          break;
                   2864: 
                   2865:        case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
                   2866:          d = (double) REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, d);
                   2867:          break;
                   2868: 
                   2869:        case FLOAT_EXTEND:
                   2870:          /* All this does is change the mode.  */
                   2871:          break;
                   2872: 
                   2873:        case FIX:
                   2874:          d = (double) REAL_VALUE_FIX_TRUNCATE (d);
                   2875:          break;
                   2876: 
                   2877:        case UNSIGNED_FIX:
                   2878:          d = (double) REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX_TRUNCATE (d);
                   2879:          break;
                   2880: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     2881:        case SQRT:
        !          2882:          return 0;
        !          2883: 
1.1       root     2884:        default:
                   2885:          abort ();
                   2886:        }
                   2887: 
                   2888:       x = immed_real_const_1 (d, mode);
                   2889:       set_float_handler (0);
                   2890:       return x;
                   2891:     }
                   2892:   else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                   2893:           && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && width > 0)
                   2894:     {
                   2895:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   2896:       jmp_buf handler;
                   2897:       rtx x;
                   2898:       int val;
                   2899: 
                   2900:       if (setjmp (handler))
                   2901:        return 0;
                   2902: 
                   2903:       set_float_handler (handler);
                   2904: 
                   2905:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
                   2906: 
                   2907:       switch (code)
                   2908:        {
                   2909:        case FIX:
                   2910:          val = REAL_VALUE_FIX (d);
                   2911:          break;
                   2912: 
                   2913:        case UNSIGNED_FIX:
                   2914:          val = REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (d);
                   2915:          break;
                   2916: 
                   2917:        default:
                   2918:          abort ();
                   2919:        }
                   2920: 
                   2921:       set_float_handler (0);
                   2922: 
                   2923:       /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
                   2924:         unless they and our sign bit are all one.
                   2925:         So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
                   2926:         unsigned value for this mode.  */
                   2927:       if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   2928:          && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
                   2929:        val &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   2930: 
                   2931:       return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
                   2932:     }
                   2933: #endif
                   2934:   else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                   2935:           || TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT)
                   2936:     {
                   2937:       /* There are some simplifications we can do even if the operands
                   2938:         aren't constant, but they don't apply to floating-point
                   2939:         unless not IEEE.  */
                   2940:       switch (code)
                   2941:        {
                   2942:        case NEG:
                   2943:        case NOT:
                   2944:          /* (not (not X)) == X, similarly for NEG.  */
                   2945:          if (GET_CODE (op) == code)
                   2946:            return XEXP (op, 0);
                   2947:          break;
                   2948: 
                   2949:        case SIGN_EXTEND:
                   2950:          /* (sign_extend (truncate (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2))))
                   2951:             becomes just the MINUS if its mode is MODE.  This allows
                   2952:             folding switch statements on machines using casesi (such as
                   2953:             the Vax).  */
                   2954:          if (GET_CODE (op) == TRUNCATE
                   2955:              && GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == mode
                   2956:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == MINUS
                   2957:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
                   2958:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)
                   2959:            return XEXP (op, 0);
                   2960:          break;
                   2961:        }
                   2962: 
                   2963:       return 0;
                   2964:     }
                   2965:   else
                   2966:     return 0;
                   2967: }
                   2968: 
                   2969: /* Simplify a binary operation CODE with result mode MODE, operating on OP0
                   2970:    and OP1.  Return 0 if no simplification is possible.
                   2971: 
                   2972:    Don't use this for relational operations such as EQ or LT.
                   2973:    Use simplify_relational_operation instead.  */
                   2974: 
                   2975: rtx
                   2976: simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
                   2977:      enum rtx_code code;
                   2978:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   2979:      rtx op0, op1;
                   2980: {
                   2981:   register int arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
                   2982:   int val;
                   2983:   int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
                   2984: 
                   2985:   /* Relational operations don't work here.  We must know the mode
                   2986:      of the operands in order to do the comparison correctly.
                   2987:      Assuming a full word can give incorrect results.
                   2988:      Consider comparing 128 with -128 in QImode.  */
                   2989: 
                   2990:   if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
                   2991:     abort ();
                   2992: 
                   2993: #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
                   2994:   if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
                   2995:       && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   2996:       && mode == GET_MODE (op0) && mode == GET_MODE (op1))
                   2997:     {
                   2998:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE f0, f1, value;
                   2999:       jmp_buf handler;
                   3000: 
                   3001:       if (setjmp (handler))
                   3002:        return 0;
                   3003: 
                   3004:       set_float_handler (handler);
                   3005: 
                   3006:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f0, op0);
                   3007:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f1, op1);
                   3008:       f0 = REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, f0);
                   3009:       f1 = REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, f1);
                   3010: 
                   3011: #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
                   3012:       REAL_ARITHMETIC (value, code, f0, f1);
                   3013: #else
                   3014:       switch (code)
                   3015:        {
                   3016:        case PLUS:
                   3017:          value = f0 + f1;
                   3018:          break;
                   3019:        case MINUS:
                   3020:          value = f0 - f1;
                   3021:          break;
                   3022:        case MULT:
                   3023:          value = f0 * f1;
                   3024:          break;
                   3025:        case DIV:
                   3026: #ifndef REAL_INFINITY
                   3027:          if (f1 == 0)
                   3028:            abort ();
                   3029: #endif
                   3030:          value = f0 / f1;
                   3031:          break;
                   3032:        case SMIN:
                   3033:          value = MIN (f0, f1);
                   3034:          break;
                   3035:        case SMAX:
                   3036:          value = MAX (f0, f1);
                   3037:          break;
                   3038:        default:
                   3039:          abort ();
                   3040:        }
                   3041: #endif
                   3042: 
                   3043:       set_float_handler (0);
                   3044:       value = REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, value);
                   3045:       return immed_real_const_1 (value, mode);
                   3046:     }
                   3047: 
                   3048:   /* We can fold some multi-word operations.  */
                   3049:   else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                   3050:           && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   3051:           && (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
                   3052:     {
                   3053:       int l1, l2, h1, h2, lv, hv;
                   3054: 
                   3055:       l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op0), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op0);
                   3056: 
                   3057:       if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
                   3058:        l2 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1), h2 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
                   3059:       else
                   3060:        l2 = INTVAL (op1), h2 = l2 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
                   3061: 
                   3062:       switch (code)
                   3063:        {
                   3064:        case MINUS:
                   3065:          /* A - B == A + (-B).  */
                   3066:          neg_double (l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
                   3067:          l2 = lv, h2 = hv;
                   3068: 
                   3069:          /* .. fall through ... */
                   3070: 
                   3071:        case PLUS:
                   3072:          add_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
                   3073:          break;
                   3074: 
                   3075:        case MULT:
                   3076:          mul_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
                   3077:          break;
                   3078: 
                   3079:        case DIV:  case MOD:   case UDIV:  case UMOD:
                   3080:          /* We'd need to include tree.h to do this and it doesn't seem worth
                   3081:             it.  */
                   3082:          return 0;
                   3083: 
                   3084:        case AND:
                   3085:          lv = l1 & l2, hv = h1 & h2;
                   3086:          break;
                   3087: 
                   3088:        case IOR:
                   3089:          lv = l1 | l2, hv = h1 | h2;
                   3090:          break;
                   3091: 
                   3092:        case XOR:
                   3093:          lv = l1 ^ l2, hv = h1 ^ h2;
                   3094:          break;
                   3095: 
                   3096:        case SMIN:
                   3097:          if (h1 < h2 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 < (unsigned) l2))
                   3098:            lv = l1, hv = h1;
                   3099:          else
                   3100:            lv = l2, hv = h2;
                   3101:          break;
                   3102: 
                   3103:        case SMAX:
                   3104:          if (h1 > h2 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 > (unsigned) l2))
                   3105:            lv = l1, hv = h1;
                   3106:          else
                   3107:            lv = l2, hv = h2;
                   3108:          break;
                   3109: 
                   3110:        case UMIN:
                   3111:          if ((unsigned) h1 < (unsigned) h2
                   3112:              || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 < (unsigned) l2))
                   3113:            lv = l1, hv = h1;
                   3114:          else
                   3115:            lv = l2, hv = h2;
                   3116:          break;
                   3117: 
                   3118:        case UMAX:
                   3119:          if ((unsigned) h1 > (unsigned) h2
                   3120:              || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 > (unsigned) l2))
                   3121:            lv = l1, hv = h1;
                   3122:          else
                   3123:            lv = l2, hv = h2;
                   3124:          break;
                   3125: 
                   3126:        case LSHIFTRT:   case ASHIFTRT:
                   3127:        case ASHIFT:     case LSHIFT:
                   3128:        case ROTATE:     case ROTATERT:
                   3129: #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
                   3130:          l2 &= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1), h2 = 0;
                   3131: #endif
                   3132: 
                   3133:          if (h2 != 0 || l2 < 0 || l2 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
                   3134:            return 0;
                   3135: 
                   3136:          if (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
                   3137:            rshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
                   3138:                           code == ASHIFTRT);
                   3139:          else if (code == ASHIFT || code == LSHIFT)
                   3140:            lshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
                   3141:                           code == ASHIFT);
                   3142:          else if (code == ROTATE)
                   3143:            lrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
                   3144:          else /* code == ROTATERT */
                   3145:            rrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
                   3146:          break;
                   3147: 
                   3148:        default:
                   3149:          return 0;
                   3150:        }
                   3151: 
                   3152:       return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
                   3153:     }
                   3154: #endif  /* not REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE, or REAL_ARITHMETIC */
                   3155: 
                   3156:   if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
                   3157:       || width > HOST_BITS_PER_INT || width == 0)
                   3158:     {
                   3159:       /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
                   3160:         there are some cases worth simplifying.  */
                   3161: 
                   3162:       switch (code)
                   3163:        {
                   3164:        case PLUS:
                   3165:          /* In IEEE floating point, x+0 is not the same as x.  Similarly
                   3166:             for the other optimizations below.  */
                   3167:          if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                   3168:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
                   3169:            break;
                   3170: 
                   3171:          if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
                   3172:            return op0;
                   3173: 
                   3174:          /* Strip off any surrounding CONSTs.  They don't matter in any of 
                   3175:             the cases below.  */
                   3176:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST)
                   3177:            op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
                   3178:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST)
                   3179:            op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
                   3180: 
                   3181:          /* ((-a) + b) -> (b - a) and similarly for (a + (-b)) */
                   3182:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == NEG)
                   3183:            {
                   3184:              rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
                   3185:                                                   op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
                   3186:              return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
                   3187:            }
                   3188:          else if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
                   3189:            {
                   3190:              rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
                   3191:                                                   op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
                   3192:              return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
                   3193:            }
                   3194: 
                   3195:          /* Don't use the associative law for floating point.
                   3196:             The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
                   3197:             and subtle programs can break if operations are associated.  */
                   3198:          if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
                   3199:            break;
                   3200: 
                   3201:          /* (a - b) + b -> a, similarly a + (b - a) -> a */
                   3202:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
                   3203:              && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 1), op1) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3204:            return XEXP (op0, 0);
                   3205: 
                   3206:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS
                   3207:              && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 1), op0) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3208:            return XEXP (op1, 0);
                   3209: 
                   3210:          /* (c1 - a) + c2 becomes (c1 + c2) - a.  */
                   3211:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
                   3212:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == CONST_INT)
                   3213:            {
                   3214:              rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode, op1,
                   3215:                                                   XEXP (op0, 0));
                   3216: 
                   3217:              return tem ? gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, tem, XEXP (op0, 1)) : 0;
                   3218:            }
                   3219: 
                   3220:          /* Handle both-operands-constant cases.  */
                   3221:          if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && CONSTANT_P (op1)
                   3222:              && GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_DOUBLE
                   3223:              && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_DOUBLE
                   3224:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3225:            {
                   3226:              if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
                   3227:                return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
                   3228:              else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
                   3229:                return plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (op0));
                   3230:              else
                   3231:                return gen_rtx (CONST, mode,
                   3232:                                gen_rtx (PLUS, mode,
                   3233:                                         GET_CODE (op0) == CONST
                   3234:                                         ? XEXP (op0, 0) : op0,
                   3235:                                         GET_CODE (op1) == CONST
                   3236:                                         ? XEXP (op1, 0) : op1));
                   3237:            }
                   3238:          else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3239:                   && GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
                   3240:                   && (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
                   3241:                       || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))))
                   3242:            /* constant + (variable + constant)
                   3243:               can result if an index register is made constant.
                   3244:               We simplify this by adding the constants.
                   3245:               If we did not, it would become an invalid address.  */
                   3246:            return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
                   3247:          break;
                   3248: 
                   3249:        case COMPARE:
                   3250: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                   3251:          /* Convert (compare FOO (const_int 0)) to FOO unless we aren't
                   3252:             using cc0, in which case we want to leave it as a COMPARE
                   3253:             so we can distinguish it from a register-register-copy.
                   3254: 
                   3255:             In IEEE floating point, x-0 is not the same as x.  */
                   3256: 
                   3257:          if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                   3258:               || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3259:              && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
                   3260:            return op0;
                   3261: #else
                   3262:          /* Do nothing here.  */
                   3263: #endif
                   3264:          break;
                   3265:              
                   3266:        case MINUS:
                   3267:          /* In IEEE floating point, x-0 is not the same as x.  */
                   3268:          if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
                   3269:              && ! side_effects_p (op0)
                   3270:              /* We can't assume x-x is 0
                   3271:                 even with non-IEEE floating point.  */
                   3272:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_FLOAT)
                   3273:            return const0_rtx;
                   3274: 
                   3275:          /* Change subtraction from zero into negation.  */
                   3276:          if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
                   3277:            return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op1);
                   3278: 
                   3279:          /* The remainer of these cases cannot be done for IEEE
                   3280:             floating-point.  */
                   3281:          if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                   3282:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
                   3283:            break;
                   3284: 
                   3285:          /* Subtracting 0 has no effect.  */
                   3286:          if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
                   3287:            return op0;
                   3288: 
                   3289:          /* Strip off any surrounding CONSTs.  They don't matter in any of 
                   3290:             the cases below.  */
                   3291:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST)
                   3292:            op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
                   3293:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST)
                   3294:            op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
                   3295: 
                   3296:          /* (a - (-b)) -> (a + b).  */
                   3297:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
                   3298:            {
                   3299:              rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode,
                   3300:                                                   op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
                   3301:              return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
                   3302:            }
                   3303: 
                   3304:          /* Don't use the associative law for floating point.
                   3305:             The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
                   3306:             and subtle programs can break if operations are associated.  */
                   3307:          if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
                   3308:            break;
                   3309: 
                   3310:          /* (a + b) - a -> b, and (b - (a + b))  -> -a  */
                   3311:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
                   3312:              && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1)
                   3313:              && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3314:            return XEXP (op0, 1);
                   3315:          else if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
                   3316:                   && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 1), op1)
                   3317:                   && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3318:            return XEXP (op0, 0);
                   3319: 
                   3320:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
                   3321:              && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)
                   3322:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3323:            {
                   3324:              rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 1),
                   3325:                                                  mode);
                   3326: 
                   3327:              return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 1));
                   3328:            }
                   3329:          else if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
                   3330:                   && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 1), op0)
                   3331:                   && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3332:            {
                   3333:              rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 0),
                   3334:                                                  mode);
                   3335: 
                   3336:              return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 0));
                   3337:            }
                   3338: 
                   3339:          /* a - (a - b) -> b */
                   3340:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS && rtx_equal_p (op0, XEXP (op1, 0))
                   3341:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3342:            return XEXP (op1, 1);
                   3343: 
                   3344:          /* (a +/- b) - (a +/- c) can be simplified.  Do variants of
                   3345:             this involving commutativity.  The most common case is
                   3346:             (a + C1) - (a + C2), but it's not hard to do all the cases.  */
                   3347:          if ((GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS)
                   3348:              && (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS))
                   3349:            {
                   3350:              rtx lhs0 = XEXP (op0, 0), lhs1 = XEXP (op0, 1);
                   3351:              rtx rhs0 = XEXP (op1, 0), rhs1 = XEXP (op1, 1);
                   3352:              int lhs_neg = GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS;
                   3353:              int rhs_neg = GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS;
                   3354:              rtx lhs = 0, rhs = 0;
                   3355: 
                   3356:              /* Set LHS and RHS to the two different terms.  */
                   3357:              if (rtx_equal_p (lhs0, rhs0) && ! side_effects_p (lhs0))
                   3358:                lhs = lhs1, rhs = rhs1;
                   3359:              else if (! rhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs0, rhs1)
                   3360:                       && ! side_effects_p (lhs0))
                   3361:                lhs = lhs1, rhs = rhs0;
                   3362:              else if (! lhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs1, rhs0)
                   3363:                       && ! side_effects_p (lhs1))
                   3364:                lhs = lhs0, rhs = rhs1;
                   3365:              else if (! lhs_neg && ! rhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs1, rhs1)
                   3366:                       && ! side_effects_p (lhs1))
                   3367:                lhs = lhs0, rhs = rhs0;
                   3368: 
                   3369:              /* The RHS is the operand of a MINUS, so its negation
                   3370:                 status should be complemented.  */
                   3371:              rhs_neg = ! rhs_neg;
                   3372: 
                   3373:              /* If we found two values equal, form the sum or difference
                   3374:                 of the remaining two terms.   */
                   3375:              if (lhs)
                   3376:                {
                   3377:                  rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (lhs_neg == rhs_neg
                   3378:                                                       ? PLUS : MINUS,
                   3379:                                                       mode,
                   3380:                                                       lhs_neg ? rhs : lhs,
                   3381:                                                       lhs_neg ? lhs : rhs);
                   3382:                  if (tem == 0)
                   3383:                    tem = gen_rtx (lhs_neg == rhs_neg
                   3384:                                   ? PLUS : MINUS,
                   3385:                                   mode, lhs_neg ? rhs : lhs,
                   3386:                                   lhs_neg ? lhs : rhs);
                   3387: 
                   3388:                  /* If both sides negated, negate result.  */
                   3389:                  if (lhs_neg && rhs_neg)
                   3390:                    {
                   3391:                      rtx tem1
                   3392:                        = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, tem, mode);
                   3393:                      if (tem1 == 0)
                   3394:                        tem1 = gen_rtx (NEG, mode, tem);
                   3395:                      tem = tem1;
                   3396:                    }
                   3397: 
                   3398:                  return tem;
                   3399:                }
                   3400: 
                   3401:              return 0;
                   3402:            }
                   3403: 
                   3404:          /* c1 - (a + c2) becomes (c1 - c2) - a.  */
                   3405:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
                   3406:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   3407:            {
                   3408:              rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0,
                   3409:                                                   XEXP (op1, 1));
                   3410: 
                   3411:              return tem ? gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, tem, XEXP (op1, 0)) : 0;
                   3412:            }
                   3413: 
                   3414:          /* c1 - (c2 - a) becomes (c1 - c2) + a.  */
                   3415:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS
                   3416:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 0)) == CONST_INT)
                   3417:            {
                   3418:              rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0,
                   3419:                                                   XEXP (op1, 0));
                   3420: 
                   3421:              return (tem && GET_CODE (tem) == CONST_INT
                   3422:                      ? plus_constant (XEXP (op1, 1), INTVAL (tem))
                   3423:                      : 0);
                   3424:            }
                   3425: 
                   3426:          /* Don't let a relocatable value get a negative coeff.  */
                   3427:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
                   3428:            return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
                   3429:          break;
                   3430: 
                   3431:        case MULT:
                   3432:          if (op1 == constm1_rtx)
                   3433:            {
                   3434:              rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op0, mode);
                   3435: 
                   3436:              return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
                   3437:            }
                   3438: 
                   3439:          /* In IEEE floating point, x*0 is not always 0.  */
                   3440:          if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                   3441:               || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3442:              && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
                   3443:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3444:            return op1;
                   3445: 
                   3446:          /* In IEEE floating point, x*1 is not equivalent to x for nans.
                   3447:             However, ANSI says we can drop signals,
                   3448:             so we can do this anyway.  */
                   3449:          if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
                   3450:            return op0;
                   3451: 
                   3452:          /* Convert multiply by constant power of two into shift.  */
                   3453:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3454:              && (val = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) >= 0)
                   3455:            return gen_rtx (ASHIFT, mode, op0,
                   3456:                            gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val));
                   3457: 
                   3458:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   3459:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT)
                   3460:            {
                   3461:              REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   3462:              REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
                   3463: 
                   3464:              /* x*2 is x+x and x*(-1) is -x */
                   3465:              if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst2)
                   3466:                  && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
                   3467:                return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, copy_rtx (op0));
                   3468: 
                   3469:              else if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconstm1)
                   3470:                       && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
                   3471:                return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
                   3472:            }
                   3473:          break;
                   3474: 
                   3475:        case IOR:
                   3476:          if (op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3477:            return op0;
                   3478:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3479:              && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
                   3480:            return op1;
                   3481:          if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3482:            return op0;
                   3483:          /* A | (~A) -> -1 */
                   3484:          if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
                   3485:               || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
                   3486:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3487:            return constm1_rtx;
                   3488:          break;
                   3489: 
                   3490:        case XOR:
                   3491:          if (op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3492:            return op0;
                   3493:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3494:              && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
                   3495:            return gen_rtx (NOT, mode, op0);
                   3496:          if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3497:            return const0_rtx;
                   3498:          break;
                   3499: 
                   3500:        case AND:
                   3501:          if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3502:            return const0_rtx;
                   3503:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3504:              && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
                   3505:            return op0;
                   3506:          if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3507:            return op0;
                   3508:          /* A & (~A) -> 0 */
                   3509:          if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
                   3510:               || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
                   3511:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3512:            return const0_rtx;
                   3513:          break;
                   3514: 
                   3515:        case UDIV:
                   3516:          /* Convert divide by power of two into shift (divide by 1 handled
                   3517:             below).  */
                   3518:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3519:              && (arg1 = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) > 0)
                   3520:            return gen_rtx (LSHIFTRT, mode, op0,
                   3521:                            gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, arg1));
                   3522: 
                   3523:          /* ... fall through ... */
                   3524: 
                   3525:        case DIV:
                   3526:          if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
                   3527:            return op0;
                   3528:          else if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
                   3529:                   && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3530:            return op0;
                   3531: #if 0 /* Turned off till an expert says this is a safe thing to do.  */
                   3532: #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
                   3533:          /* Change division by a constant into multiplication.  */
                   3534:          else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   3535:                   && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT
                   3536:                   && op1 != CONST0_RTX (mode))
                   3537:            {
                   3538:              REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   3539:              REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
                   3540:              if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst0))
                   3541:                abort();
                   3542: #if defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
                   3543:              REAL_ARITHMETIC (d, RDIV_EXPR, dconst1, d);
                   3544:              return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0, 
                   3545:                              CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode));
                   3546: #else
                   3547:              return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0, 
                   3548:                              CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (1./d, mode));
                   3549:            }
                   3550: #endif
                   3551: #endif
                   3552: #endif
                   3553:          break;
                   3554: 
                   3555:        case UMOD:
                   3556:          /* Handle modulus by power of two (mod with 1 handled below).  */
                   3557:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3558:              && exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1)) > 0)
                   3559:            return gen_rtx (AND, mode, op0, 
                   3560:                            gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, INTVAL (op1) - 1));
                   3561: 
                   3562:          /* ... fall through ... */
                   3563: 
                   3564:        case MOD:
                   3565:          if ((op0 == const0_rtx || op1 == const1_rtx)
                   3566:              && ! side_effects_p (op0) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3567:            return const0_rtx;
                   3568:          break;
                   3569: 
                   3570:        case ROTATERT:
                   3571:        case ROTATE:
                   3572:          /* Rotating ~0 always results in ~0.  */
                   3573:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   3574:              && INTVAL (op0) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
                   3575:              && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3576:            return op0;
                   3577: 
                   3578:          /* ... fall through ... */
                   3579: 
                   3580:        case LSHIFT:
                   3581:        case ASHIFT:
                   3582:        case ASHIFTRT:
                   3583:        case LSHIFTRT:
                   3584:          if (op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3585:            return op0;
                   3586:          if (op0 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3587:            return op0;
                   3588:          break;
                   3589: 
                   3590:        case SMIN:
                   3591:          if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT 
                   3592:              && INTVAL (op1) == 1 << (width -1)
                   3593:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3594:            return op1;
                   3595:          else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3596:            return op0;
                   3597:          break;
                   3598:           
                   3599:        case SMAX:
                   3600:          if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3601:              && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1
                   3602:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3603:            return op1;
                   3604:          else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3605:            return op0;
                   3606:          break;
                   3607: 
                   3608:        case UMIN:
                   3609:          if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3610:            return op1;
                   3611:          else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3612:            return op0;
                   3613:          break;
                   3614:            
                   3615:        case UMAX:
                   3616:          if (op1 == constm1_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3617:            return op1;
                   3618:          else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3619:            return op0;
                   3620:          break;
                   3621: 
                   3622:        default:
                   3623:          abort ();
                   3624:        }
                   3625:       
                   3626:       return 0;
                   3627:     }
                   3628: 
                   3629:   /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
                   3630:      zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S.  */
                   3631: 
                   3632:   arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
                   3633:   arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
                   3634: 
                   3635:   if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   3636:     {
                   3637:       arg0 &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   3638:       arg1 &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   3639: 
                   3640:       arg0s = arg0;
                   3641:       if (arg0s & (1 << (width - 1)))
                   3642:        arg0s |= ((-1) << width);
                   3643: 
                   3644:       arg1s = arg1;
                   3645:       if (arg1s & (1 << (width - 1)))
                   3646:        arg1s |= ((-1) << width);
                   3647:     }
                   3648:   else
                   3649:     {
                   3650:       arg0s = arg0;
                   3651:       arg1s = arg1;
                   3652:     }
                   3653: 
                   3654:   /* Compute the value of the arithmetic.  */
                   3655: 
                   3656:   switch (code)
                   3657:     {
                   3658:     case PLUS:
1.1.1.2 ! root     3659:       val = arg0s + arg1s;
1.1       root     3660:       break;
                   3661: 
                   3662:     case MINUS:
1.1.1.2 ! root     3663:       val = arg0s - arg1s;
1.1       root     3664:       break;
                   3665: 
                   3666:     case MULT:
                   3667:       val = arg0s * arg1s;
                   3668:       break;
                   3669: 
                   3670:     case DIV:
                   3671:       if (arg1s == 0)
                   3672:        return 0;
                   3673:       val = arg0s / arg1s;
                   3674:       break;
                   3675: 
                   3676:     case MOD:
                   3677:       if (arg1s == 0)
                   3678:        return 0;
                   3679:       val = arg0s % arg1s;
                   3680:       break;
                   3681: 
                   3682:     case UDIV:
                   3683:       if (arg1 == 0)
                   3684:        return 0;
                   3685:       val = (unsigned) arg0 / arg1;
                   3686:       break;
                   3687: 
                   3688:     case UMOD:
                   3689:       if (arg1 == 0)
                   3690:        return 0;
                   3691:       val = (unsigned) arg0 % arg1;
                   3692:       break;
                   3693: 
                   3694:     case AND:
                   3695:       val = arg0 & arg1;
                   3696:       break;
                   3697: 
                   3698:     case IOR:
                   3699:       val = arg0 | arg1;
                   3700:       break;
                   3701: 
                   3702:     case XOR:
                   3703:       val = arg0 ^ arg1;
                   3704:       break;
                   3705: 
                   3706:     case LSHIFTRT:
                   3707:       /* If shift count is undefined, don't fold it; let the machine do
                   3708:         what it wants.  But truncate it if the machine will do that.  */
                   3709:       if (arg1 < 0)
                   3710:        return 0;
                   3711: 
                   3712: #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
                   3713:       arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
                   3714: #endif
                   3715: 
                   3716:       if (arg1 >= width)
                   3717:        return 0;
                   3718: 
                   3719:       val = ((unsigned) arg0) >> arg1;
                   3720:       break;
                   3721: 
                   3722:     case ASHIFT:
                   3723:     case LSHIFT:
                   3724:       if (arg1 < 0)
                   3725:        return 0;
                   3726: 
                   3727: #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
                   3728:       arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
                   3729: #endif
                   3730: 
                   3731:       if (arg1 >= width)
                   3732:        return 0;
                   3733: 
                   3734:       val = ((unsigned) arg0) << arg1;
                   3735:       break;
                   3736: 
                   3737:     case ASHIFTRT:
                   3738:       if (arg1 < 0)
                   3739:        return 0;
                   3740: 
                   3741: #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
                   3742:       arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
                   3743: #endif
                   3744: 
                   3745:       if (arg1 >= width)
                   3746:        return 0;
                   3747: 
                   3748:       val = arg0s >> arg1;
                   3749:       break;
                   3750: 
                   3751:     case ROTATERT:
                   3752:       if (arg1 < 0)
                   3753:        return 0;
                   3754: 
                   3755:       arg1 %= width;
                   3756:       val = ((((unsigned) arg0) << (width - arg1))
                   3757:             | (((unsigned) arg0) >> arg1));
                   3758:       break;
                   3759: 
                   3760:     case ROTATE:
                   3761:       if (arg1 < 0)
                   3762:        return 0;
                   3763: 
                   3764:       arg1 %= width;
                   3765:       val = ((((unsigned) arg0) << arg1)
                   3766:             | (((unsigned) arg0) >> (width - arg1)));
                   3767:       break;
                   3768: 
                   3769:     case COMPARE:
                   3770:       /* Do nothing here.  */
                   3771:       return 0;
                   3772: 
                   3773:     default:
                   3774:       abort ();
                   3775:     }
                   3776: 
                   3777:   /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
                   3778:      bit are all one.  So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
                   3779:      reasonable unsigned value for this mode.  */
                   3780:   if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   3781:       && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
                   3782:     val &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   3783:   
                   3784:   return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
                   3785: }
                   3786: 
                   3787: /* Like simplify_binary_operation except used for relational operators.
                   3788:    MODE is the mode of the operands, not that of the result.  */
                   3789: 
                   3790: rtx
                   3791: simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
                   3792:      enum rtx_code code;
                   3793:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   3794:      rtx op0, op1;
                   3795: {
                   3796:   register int arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
                   3797:   int val;
                   3798:   int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
                   3799: 
                   3800:   /* If op0 is a compare, extract the comparison arguments from it.  */
                   3801:   if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE && op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3802:     op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
                   3803: 
                   3804:   if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
                   3805:       || width > HOST_BITS_PER_INT || width == 0)
                   3806:     {
                   3807:       /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
                   3808:         there are some cases worth simplifying.  */
                   3809: 
                   3810:       /* For non-IEEE floating-point, if the two operands are equal, we know
                   3811:         the result.  */
                   3812:       if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
                   3813:          && (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                   3814:              || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) != MODE_FLOAT))
                   3815:        return (code == EQ || code == GE || code == LE || code == LEU
                   3816:                || code == GEU) ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3817:       else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   3818:               && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   3819:               && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_FLOAT)
                   3820:        {
                   3821:          REAL_VALUE_TYPE d0, d1;
                   3822:          int value;
                   3823:          jmp_buf handler;
                   3824:          int op0lt, op1lt, equal;
                   3825: 
                   3826:          if (setjmp (handler))
                   3827:            return 0;
                   3828: 
                   3829:          set_float_handler (handler);
                   3830:          REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d0, op0);
                   3831:          REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d1, op1);
                   3832:          equal = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d0, d1);
                   3833:          op0lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d0, d1);
                   3834:          op1lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d1, d0);
                   3835:          set_float_handler (0);
                   3836: 
                   3837:          switch (code)
                   3838:            {
                   3839:            case EQ:
                   3840:              return equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3841:            case NE:
                   3842:              return !equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3843:            case LE:
                   3844:              return equal || op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3845:            case LT:
                   3846:              return op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3847:            case GE:
                   3848:              return equal || op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3849:            case GT:
                   3850:              return op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3851:            }
                   3852:        }
                   3853:       
                   3854:       switch (code)
                   3855:        {
                   3856:        case EQ:
                   3857:          {
                   3858: #if 0
                   3859:            /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
                   3860:            if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3861:              return const0_rtx;
                   3862: #endif
                   3863:            if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3864:              return const0_rtx;
                   3865:            break;
                   3866:          }
                   3867: 
                   3868:        case NE:
                   3869: #if 0
                   3870:          /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
                   3871:          if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3872:            return const_true_rtx;
                   3873: #endif
                   3874:          if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3875:            return const_true_rtx;
                   3876:          break;
                   3877: 
                   3878:        case GEU:
                   3879:          /* Unsigned values are never negative, but we must be sure we are
                   3880:             actually comparing a value, not a CC operand.  */
                   3881:          if (op1 == const0_rtx
                   3882:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3883:            return const_true_rtx;
                   3884:          break;
                   3885: 
                   3886:        case LTU:
                   3887:          if (op1 == const0_rtx
                   3888:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3889:            return const0_rtx;
                   3890:          break;
                   3891: 
                   3892:        case LEU:
                   3893:          /* Unsigned values are never greater than the largest
                   3894:             unsigned value.  */
                   3895:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3896:              && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
                   3897:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3898:            return const_true_rtx;
                   3899:          break;
                   3900: 
                   3901:        case GTU:
                   3902:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3903:              && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
                   3904:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3905:            return const0_rtx;
                   3906:          break;
                   3907:        }
                   3908: 
                   3909:       return 0;
                   3910:     }
                   3911: 
                   3912:   /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
                   3913:      zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S.  */
                   3914: 
                   3915:   arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
                   3916:   arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
                   3917: 
                   3918:   if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   3919:     {
                   3920:       arg0 &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   3921:       arg1 &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   3922: 
                   3923:       arg0s = arg0;
                   3924:       if (arg0s & (1 << (width - 1)))
                   3925:        arg0s |= ((-1) << width);
                   3926: 
                   3927:       arg1s = arg1;
                   3928:       if (arg1s & (1 << (width - 1)))
                   3929:        arg1s |= ((-1) << width);
                   3930:     }
                   3931:   else
                   3932:     {
                   3933:       arg0s = arg0;
                   3934:       arg1s = arg1;
                   3935:     }
                   3936: 
                   3937:   /* Compute the value of the arithmetic.  */
                   3938: 
                   3939:   switch (code)
                   3940:     {
                   3941:     case NE:
                   3942:       val = arg0 != arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3943:       break;
                   3944: 
                   3945:     case EQ:
                   3946:       val = arg0 == arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3947:       break;
                   3948: 
                   3949:     case LE:
                   3950:       val = arg0s <= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3951:       break;
                   3952: 
                   3953:     case LT:
                   3954:       val = arg0s < arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3955:       break;
                   3956: 
                   3957:     case GE:
                   3958:       val = arg0s >= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3959:       break;
                   3960: 
                   3961:     case GT:
                   3962:       val = arg0s > arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3963:       break;
                   3964: 
                   3965:     case LEU:
                   3966:       val = ((unsigned) arg0) <= ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3967:       break;
                   3968: 
                   3969:     case LTU:
                   3970:       val = ((unsigned) arg0) < ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3971:       break;
                   3972: 
                   3973:     case GEU:
                   3974:       val = ((unsigned) arg0) >= ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3975:       break;
                   3976: 
                   3977:     case GTU:
                   3978:       val = ((unsigned) arg0) > ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3979:       break;
                   3980: 
                   3981:     default:
                   3982:       abort ();
                   3983:     }
                   3984: 
                   3985:   /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
                   3986:      bit are all one.  So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
                   3987:      reasonable unsigned value for this mode.  */
                   3988:   if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   3989:       && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
                   3990:     val &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   3991:   
                   3992:   return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
                   3993: }
                   3994: 
                   3995: /* Simplify CODE, an operation with result mode MODE and three operands,
                   3996:    OP0, OP1, and OP2.  OP0_MODE was the mode of OP0 before it became
                   3997:    a constant.  Return 0 if no simplifications is possible.  */
                   3998: 
                   3999: rtx
                   4000: simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, op0, op1, op2)
                   4001:      enum rtx_code code;
                   4002:      enum machine_mode mode, op0_mode;
                   4003:      rtx op0, op1, op2;
                   4004: {
                   4005:   int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
                   4006: 
                   4007:   /* VOIDmode means "infinite" precision.  */
                   4008:   if (width == 0)
                   4009:     width = HOST_BITS_PER_INT;
                   4010: 
                   4011:   switch (code)
                   4012:     {
                   4013:     case SIGN_EXTRACT:
                   4014:     case ZERO_EXTRACT:
                   4015:       if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT
                   4016:          && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   4017:          && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
                   4018:          && INTVAL (op1) + INTVAL (op2) <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode)
                   4019:          && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   4020:        {
                   4021:          /* Extracting a bit-field from a constant */
                   4022:          int val = INTVAL (op0);
                   4023: 
                   4024: #if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
                   4025:          val >>= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode) - INTVAL (op2) - INTVAL (op1));
                   4026: #else
                   4027:          val >>= INTVAL (op2);
                   4028: #endif
                   4029:          if (HOST_BITS_PER_INT != INTVAL (op1))
                   4030:            {
                   4031:              /* First zero-extend.  */
                   4032:              val &= (1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1;
                   4033:              /* If desired, propagate sign bit.  */
                   4034:              if (code == SIGN_EXTRACT && (val & (1 << (INTVAL (op1) - 1))))
                   4035:                val |= ~ (1 << INTVAL (op1));
                   4036:            }
                   4037: 
                   4038:          /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
                   4039:             unless they and our sign bit are all one.
                   4040:             So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
                   4041:             unsigned value for this mode.  */
                   4042:          if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   4043:              && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
                   4044:            val &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   4045: 
                   4046:          return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
                   4047:        }
                   4048:       break;
                   4049: 
                   4050:     case IF_THEN_ELSE:
                   4051:       if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
                   4052:        return op0 != const0_rtx ? op1 : op2;
                   4053:       break;
                   4054: 
                   4055:     default:
                   4056:       abort ();
                   4057:     }
                   4058: 
                   4059:   return 0;
                   4060: }
                   4061: 
                   4062: /* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument
                   4063:    for which a constant value can be determined, return
                   4064:    the result of operating on that value, as a constant.
                   4065:    Otherwise, return X, possibly with one or more operands
                   4066:    modified by recursive calls to this function.
                   4067: 
                   4068:    If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT
                   4069:    return those contents.  This is because an instruction that
                   4070:    uses a register is usually faster than one that uses a constant.
                   4071: 
                   4072:    INSN is the insn that we may be modifying.  If it is 0, make a copy
                   4073:    of X before modifying it.  */
                   4074: 
                   4075: static rtx
                   4076: fold_rtx (x, insn)
                   4077:      rtx x;
                   4078:      rtx insn;    
                   4079: {
                   4080:   register enum rtx_code code;
                   4081:   register enum machine_mode mode;
                   4082:   register char *fmt;
                   4083:   register int i, val;
                   4084:   rtx new = 0;
                   4085:   int copied = 0;
                   4086:   int must_swap = 0;
                   4087: 
                   4088:   /* Folded equivalents of first two operands of X.  */
                   4089:   rtx folded_arg0;
                   4090:   rtx folded_arg1;
                   4091: 
                   4092:   /* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
                   4093:      0 when no such equivalent is known.  */
                   4094:   rtx const_arg0;
                   4095:   rtx const_arg1;
                   4096:   rtx const_arg2;
                   4097: 
                   4098:   /* The mode of the first operand of X.  We need this for sign and zero
                   4099:      extends.  */
                   4100:   enum machine_mode mode_arg0;
                   4101: 
                   4102:   if (x == 0)
                   4103:     return x;
                   4104: 
                   4105:   mode = GET_MODE (x);
                   4106:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                   4107:   switch (code)
                   4108:     {
                   4109:     case CONST:
                   4110:     case CONST_INT:
                   4111:     case CONST_DOUBLE:
                   4112:     case SYMBOL_REF:
                   4113:     case LABEL_REF:
                   4114:     case REG:
                   4115:       /* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
                   4116:         since they are used only for lists of args
                   4117:         in a function call's REG_EQUAL note.  */
                   4118:     case EXPR_LIST:
                   4119:       return x;
                   4120: 
                   4121: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                   4122:     case CC0:
                   4123:       return prev_insn_cc0;
                   4124: #endif
                   4125: 
                   4126:     case PC:
                   4127:       /* If the next insn is a CODE_LABEL followed by a jump table,
                   4128:         PC's value is a LABEL_REF pointing to that label.  That
                   4129:         lets us fold switch statements on the Vax.  */
                   4130:       if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
                   4131:        {
                   4132:          rtx next = next_nonnote_insn (insn);
                   4133: 
                   4134:          if (next && GET_CODE (next) == CODE_LABEL
                   4135:              && NEXT_INSN (next) != 0
                   4136:              && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (next)) == JUMP_INSN
                   4137:              && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_VEC
                   4138:                  || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC))
                   4139:            return gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, next);
                   4140:        }
                   4141:       break;
                   4142: 
                   4143:     case SUBREG:
                   4144:       /* If this is a single word of a multi-word value, see if we previously
                   4145:         assigned a value to that word.  */
                   4146:       if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
                   4147:          && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) > UNITS_PER_WORD
                   4148:          && (new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0)
                   4149:        return new;
                   4150: 
                   4151:       /* Fold SUBREG_REG.  If it changed, see if we can simplify the SUBREG.
                   4152:         We might be able to if the SUBREG is extracting a single word in an
                   4153:         integral mode or extracting the low part.  */
                   4154: 
                   4155:       folded_arg0 = fold_rtx (SUBREG_REG (x), insn);
                   4156:       const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
                   4157:       if (const_arg0)
                   4158:        folded_arg0 = const_arg0;
                   4159: 
                   4160:       if (folded_arg0 != SUBREG_REG (x))
                   4161:        {
                   4162:          new = 0;
                   4163: 
                   4164:          if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                   4165:              && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
                   4166:              && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != VOIDmode)
                   4167:            new = operand_subword (folded_arg0, SUBREG_WORD (x), 0,
                   4168:                                   GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)));
                   4169:          if (new == 0 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
                   4170:            new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, folded_arg0);
                   4171:          if (new)
                   4172:            return new;
                   4173:        }
                   4174:       return x;
                   4175: 
                   4176:     case NOT:
                   4177:     case NEG:
                   4178:       /* If we have (NOT Y), see if Y is known to be (NOT Z).
                   4179:         If so, (NOT Y) simplifies to Z.  Similarly for NEG.  */
                   4180:       new = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), code);
                   4181:       if (new)
                   4182:        return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (XEXP (new, 0)), insn);
                   4183:       break;
                   4184:       
                   4185:     case MEM:
                   4186:       /* If we are not actually processing an insn, don't try to find the
                   4187:         best address.  Not only don't we care, but we could modify the
                   4188:         MEM in an invalid way since we have no insn to validate against.  */
                   4189:       if (insn != 0)
                   4190:        find_best_addr (insn, &XEXP (x, 0));
                   4191: 
                   4192:       {
                   4193:        /* Even if we don't fold in the insn itself,
                   4194:           we can safely do so here, in hopes of getting a constant.  */
                   4195:        rtx addr = fold_rtx (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
                   4196:        rtx base = 0;
                   4197:        int offset = 0;
                   4198: 
                   4199:        if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
                   4200:            && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
                   4201:            && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
                   4202:            && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
                   4203:          addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
                   4204: 
                   4205:        /* If address is constant, split it into a base and integer offset.  */
                   4206:        if (GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF || GET_CODE (addr) == LABEL_REF)
                   4207:          base = addr;
                   4208:        else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == PLUS
                   4209:                 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   4210:          {
                   4211:            base = XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 0);
                   4212:            offset = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1));
                   4213:          }
                   4214:        else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM
                   4215:                 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF)
                   4216:          base = XEXP (addr, 1);
                   4217: 
                   4218:        /* If this is a constant pool reference, we can fold it into its
                   4219:           constant to allow better value tracking.  */
                   4220:        if (base && GET_CODE (base) == SYMBOL_REF
                   4221:            && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (base))
                   4222:          {
                   4223:            rtx constant = get_pool_constant (base);
                   4224:            enum machine_mode const_mode = get_pool_mode (base);
                   4225:            rtx new;
                   4226: 
                   4227:            if (CONSTANT_P (constant) && GET_CODE (constant) != CONST_INT)
                   4228:              constant_pool_entries_cost = COST (constant);
                   4229: 
                   4230:            /* If we are loading the full constant, we have an equivalence.  */
                   4231:            if (offset == 0 && mode == const_mode)
                   4232:              return constant;
                   4233: 
                   4234:            /* If this actually isn't a constant (wierd!), we can't do
                   4235:               anything.  Otherwise, handle the two most common cases:
                   4236:               extracting a word from a multi-word constant, and extracting
                   4237:               the low-order bits.  Other cases don't seem common enough to
                   4238:               worry about.  */
                   4239:            if (! CONSTANT_P (constant))
                   4240:              return x;
                   4241: 
                   4242:            if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                   4243:                && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
                   4244:                && offset % UNITS_PER_WORD == 0
                   4245:                && (new = operand_subword (constant,
                   4246:                                           offset / UNITS_PER_WORD,
                   4247:                                           0, const_mode)) != 0)
                   4248:              return new;
                   4249: 
                   4250:            if (((BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
                   4251:                  && offset == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (constant)) - 1)
                   4252:                 || (! BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && offset == 0))
                   4253:                && (new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, constant)) != 0)
                   4254:              return new;
                   4255:          }
                   4256: 
                   4257:        /* If this is a reference to a label at a known position in a jump
                   4258:           table, we also know its value.  */
                   4259:        if (base && GET_CODE (base) == LABEL_REF)
                   4260:          {
                   4261:            rtx label = XEXP (base, 0);
                   4262:            rtx table_insn = NEXT_INSN (label);
                   4263:            
                   4264:            if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
                   4265:                && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_VEC)
                   4266:              {
                   4267:                rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
                   4268: 
                   4269:                if (offset >= 0
                   4270:                    && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
                   4271:                        < XVECLEN (table, 0)))
                   4272:                  return XVECEXP (table, 0,
                   4273:                                  offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table)));
                   4274:              }
                   4275:            if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
                   4276:                && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC)
                   4277:              {
                   4278:                rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
                   4279: 
                   4280:                if (offset >= 0
                   4281:                    && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
                   4282:                        < XVECLEN (table, 1)))
                   4283:                  {
                   4284:                    offset /= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table));
                   4285:                    new = gen_rtx (MINUS, Pmode, XVECEXP (table, 1, offset),
                   4286:                                   XEXP (table, 0));
                   4287: 
                   4288:                    if (GET_MODE (table) != Pmode)
                   4289:                      new = gen_rtx (TRUNCATE, GET_MODE (table), new);
                   4290: 
                   4291:                    return new;
                   4292:                  }
                   4293:              }
                   4294:          }
                   4295: 
                   4296:        return x;
                   4297:       }
                   4298:     }
                   4299: 
                   4300:   const_arg0 = 0;
                   4301:   const_arg1 = 0;
                   4302:   const_arg2 = 0;
                   4303:   mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
                   4304: 
                   4305:   /* Try folding our operands.
                   4306:      Then see which ones have constant values known.  */
                   4307: 
                   4308:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   4309:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   4310:     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   4311:       {
                   4312:        rtx arg = XEXP (x, i);
                   4313:        rtx folded_arg = arg, const_arg = 0;
                   4314:        enum machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (arg);
                   4315:        rtx cheap_arg, expensive_arg;
                   4316:        rtx replacements[2];
                   4317:        int j;
                   4318: 
                   4319:        /* Most arguments are cheap, so handle them specially.  */
                   4320:        switch (GET_CODE (arg))
                   4321:          {
                   4322:          case REG:
                   4323:            /* This is the same as calling equiv_constant; it is duplicated
                   4324:               here for speed.  */
                   4325:            if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (arg))
                   4326:                && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]] != 0
                   4327:                && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != REG
                   4328:                && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != PLUS)
                   4329:              const_arg
                   4330:                = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (arg),
                   4331:                                           qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]);
                   4332:            break;
                   4333: 
                   4334:          case CONST:
                   4335:          case CONST_INT:
                   4336:          case SYMBOL_REF:
                   4337:          case LABEL_REF:
                   4338:          case CONST_DOUBLE:
                   4339:            const_arg = arg;
                   4340:            break;
                   4341: 
                   4342: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                   4343:          case CC0:
                   4344:            folded_arg = prev_insn_cc0;
                   4345:            mode_arg = prev_insn_cc0_mode;
                   4346:            const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
                   4347:            break;
                   4348: #endif
                   4349: 
                   4350:          default:
                   4351:            folded_arg = fold_rtx (arg, insn);
                   4352:            const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
                   4353:          }
                   4354: 
                   4355:        /* For the first three operands, see if the operand
                   4356:           is constant or equivalent to a constant.  */
                   4357:        switch (i)
                   4358:          {
                   4359:          case 0:
                   4360:            folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
                   4361:            const_arg0 = const_arg;
                   4362:            mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
                   4363:            break;
                   4364:          case 1:
                   4365:            folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
                   4366:            const_arg1 = const_arg;
                   4367:            break;
                   4368:          case 2:
                   4369:            const_arg2 = const_arg;
                   4370:            break;
                   4371:          }
                   4372: 
                   4373:        /* Pick the least expensive of the folded argument and an
                   4374:           equivalent constant argument.  */
                   4375:        if (const_arg == 0 || const_arg == folded_arg
                   4376:            || COST (const_arg) > COST (folded_arg))
                   4377:          cheap_arg = folded_arg, expensive_arg = const_arg;
                   4378:        else
                   4379:          cheap_arg = const_arg, expensive_arg = folded_arg;
                   4380: 
                   4381:        /* Try to replace the operand with the cheapest of the two
                   4382:           possibilities.  If it doesn't work and this is either of the first
                   4383:           two operands of a commutative operation, try swapping them.
                   4384:           If THAT fails, try the more expensive, provided it is cheaper
                   4385:           than what is already there.  */
                   4386: 
                   4387:        if (cheap_arg == XEXP (x, i))
                   4388:          continue;
                   4389: 
                   4390:        if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
                   4391:          {
                   4392:            x = copy_rtx (x);
                   4393:            copied = 1;
                   4394:          }
                   4395: 
                   4396:        replacements[0] = cheap_arg, replacements[1] = expensive_arg;
                   4397:        for (j = 0;
                   4398:             j < 2 && replacements[j]
                   4399:             && COST (replacements[j]) < COST (XEXP (x, i));
                   4400:             j++)
                   4401:          {
                   4402:            if (validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), replacements[j], 0))
                   4403:              break;
                   4404: 
                   4405:            if (code == NE || code == EQ || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
                   4406:              {
                   4407:                validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), XEXP (x, 1 - i), 1);
                   4408:                validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1 - i), replacements[j], 1);
                   4409: 
                   4410:                if (apply_change_group ())
                   4411:                  {
                   4412:                    /* Swap them back to be invalid so that this loop can
                   4413:                       continue and flag them to be swapped back later.  */
                   4414:                    rtx tem;
                   4415: 
                   4416:                    tem = XEXP (x, 0); XEXP (x, 0) = XEXP (x, 1);
                   4417:                                       XEXP (x, 1) = tem;
                   4418:                    must_swap = 1;
                   4419:                    break;
                   4420:                  }
                   4421:              }
                   4422:          }
                   4423:       }
                   4424: 
                   4425:     else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   4426:       /* Don't try to fold inside of a vector of expressions.
                   4427:         Doing nothing is harmless.  */
                   4428:       ;
                   4429: 
                   4430:   /* If a commutative operation, place a constant integer as the second
                   4431:      operand unless the first operand is also a constant integer.  Otherwise,
                   4432:      place any constant second unless the first operand is also a constant.  */
                   4433: 
                   4434:   if (code == EQ || code == NE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
                   4435:     {
                   4436:       if (must_swap || (const_arg0
                   4437:                        && (const_arg1 == 0
                   4438:                            || (GET_CODE (const_arg0) == CONST_INT
                   4439:                                && GET_CODE (const_arg1) != CONST_INT))))
                   4440:        {
                   4441:          register rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0);
                   4442: 
                   4443:          if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
                   4444:            {
                   4445:              x = copy_rtx (x);
                   4446:              copied = 1;
                   4447:            }
                   4448: 
                   4449:          validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1), 1);
                   4450:          validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1), tem, 1);
                   4451:          if (apply_change_group ())
                   4452:            {
                   4453:              tem = const_arg0, const_arg0 = const_arg1, const_arg1 = tem;
                   4454:              tem = folded_arg0, folded_arg0 = folded_arg1, folded_arg1 = tem;
                   4455:            }
                   4456:        }
                   4457:     }
                   4458: 
                   4459:   /* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it.  */
                   4460: 
                   4461:   switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
                   4462:     {
                   4463:     case '1':
                   4464:       new = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
                   4465:                                      const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
                   4466:                                      mode_arg0);
                   4467:       break;
                   4468:       
                   4469:     case '<':
                   4470:       /* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
                   4471:         to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code.  If any are
                   4472:         constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately.  We needn't
                   4473:         do anything if both operands are already known to be constant.  */
                   4474: 
                   4475:       if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
                   4476:        {
                   4477:          struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
                   4478: 
                   4479:          code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1);
                   4480:          const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
                   4481:          const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
                   4482: 
                   4483:          /* Get a mode from the values actually being compared, or from the
                   4484:             old value of MODE_ARG0 if both are constants.  If the resulting
                   4485:             mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know what kinds
                   4486:             of things are being compared, so we can't do anything with this
                   4487:             comparison.  */
                   4488: 
                   4489:          if (GET_MODE (folded_arg0) != VOIDmode
                   4490:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (folded_arg0)) != MODE_CC)
                   4491:            mode_arg0 = GET_MODE (folded_arg0);
                   4492: 
                   4493:          else if (GET_MODE (folded_arg1) != VOIDmode
                   4494:                   && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (folded_arg1)) != MODE_CC)
                   4495:            mode_arg0 = GET_MODE (folded_arg1);
                   4496: 
                   4497:          if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
                   4498:            break;
                   4499: 
                   4500:          /* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see if we
                   4501:             can nevertheless deduce some things about the comparison.  */
                   4502:          if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
                   4503:            {
                   4504:              /* Is FOLDED_ARG0 frame-pointer plus a constant?  Or non-explicit
                   4505:                 constant?  These aren't zero, but we don't know their sign. */
                   4506:              if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx
                   4507:                  && (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (folded_arg0)
                   4508: #if 0  /* Sad to say, on sysvr4, #pragma weak can make a symbol address
                   4509:          come out as 0.  */
                   4510:                      || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == SYMBOL_REF
                   4511: #endif
                   4512:                      || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == LABEL_REF
                   4513:                      || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST))
                   4514:                {
                   4515:                  if (code == EQ)
                   4516:                    return const0_rtx;
                   4517:                  else if (code == NE)
                   4518:                    return const_true_rtx;
                   4519:                }
                   4520: 
                   4521:              /* See if the two operands are the same.  We don't do this
                   4522:                 for IEEE floating-point since we can't assume x == x
                   4523:                 since x might be a NaN.  */
                   4524: 
                   4525:              if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                   4526:                   || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) != MODE_FLOAT)
                   4527:                  && (folded_arg0 == folded_arg1
                   4528:                      || (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
                   4529:                          && GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
                   4530:                          && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)]
                   4531:                              == reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]))
                   4532:                      || ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
                   4533:                                        (safe_hash (folded_arg0, mode_arg0)
                   4534:                                         % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
                   4535:                          && (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
                   4536:                                           (safe_hash (folded_arg1, mode_arg0)
                   4537:                                            % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
                   4538:                          && p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value)))
                   4539:                return ((code == EQ || code == LE || code == GE
                   4540:                         || code == LEU || code == GEU)
                   4541:                        ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx);
                   4542: 
                   4543:              /* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
                   4544:                 doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
                   4545:                 (we only check the reverse if not floating-point).  */
                   4546:              else if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG)
                   4547:                {
                   4548:                  int qty = reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)];
                   4549: 
                   4550:                  if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0))
                   4551:                      && (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty], code)
                   4552:                          || (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
                   4553:                                                      reverse_condition (code))
                   4554:                              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_INT))
                   4555:                      && (rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty], folded_arg1)
                   4556:                          || (const_arg1
                   4557:                              && rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty],
                   4558:                                              const_arg1))
                   4559:                          || (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
                   4560:                              && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]
                   4561:                                  == qty_comparison_qty[qty]))))
                   4562:                    return (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
                   4563:                                                    code)
                   4564:                            ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx);
                   4565:                }
                   4566:            }
                   4567:        }
                   4568: 
                   4569:       /* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
                   4570:         equivalent to an IOR with a constant.  If so, we may be able to
                   4571:         determine the result of this comparison.  */
                   4572: 
                   4573:       if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx)
                   4574:        {
                   4575:          rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
                   4576:          rtx inner_const;
                   4577: 
                   4578:          if (y != 0
                   4579:              && (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
                   4580:              && GET_CODE (inner_const) == CONST_INT
                   4581:              && INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
                   4582:            {
                   4583:              int sign_bitnum = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode_arg0) - 1;
                   4584:              int has_sign = (HOST_BITS_PER_INT >= sign_bitnum
                   4585:                              && (INTVAL (inner_const) & (1 << sign_bitnum)));
                   4586: 
                   4587:              switch (code)
                   4588:                {
                   4589:                case EQ:
                   4590:                  return const0_rtx;
                   4591:                case NE:
                   4592:                  return const_true_rtx;
                   4593:                case LT:  case LE:
                   4594:                  if (has_sign)
                   4595:                    return const_true_rtx;
                   4596:                  break;
                   4597:                case GT:  case GE:
                   4598:                  if (has_sign)
                   4599:                    return const0_rtx;
                   4600:                  break;
                   4601:                }
                   4602:            }
                   4603:        }
                   4604: 
                   4605:       new = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode_arg0,
                   4606:                                           const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
                   4607:                                           const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
                   4608:       break;
                   4609: 
                   4610:     case '2':
                   4611:     case 'c':
                   4612:       switch (code)
                   4613:        {
                   4614:        case PLUS:
                   4615:          /* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
                   4616:             with that LABEL_REF as its second operand.  If so, the result is
                   4617:             the first operand of that MINUS.  This handles switches with an
                   4618:             ADDR_DIFF_VEC table.  */
                   4619:          if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
                   4620:            {
                   4621:              rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
                   4622: 
                   4623:              if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
                   4624:                  && XEXP (XEXP (y, 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg1, 0))
                   4625:                return XEXP (y, 0);
                   4626:            }
                   4627: 
                   4628:          /* ... fall through ... */
                   4629: 
                   4630:        case MINUS:
                   4631:        case SMIN:    case SMAX:      case UMIN:    case UMAX:
                   4632:        case IOR:     case AND:       case XOR:
                   4633:        case MULT:    case DIV:       case UDIV:
                   4634:        case ASHIFT:  case LSHIFTRT:  case ASHIFTRT:
                   4635:          /* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
                   4636:             is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
                   4637:             operation with a combined operation.  This may eliminate the
                   4638:             intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
                   4639:             Note that the similar optimization done by combine.c only works
                   4640:             if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference.  */
                   4641: 
                   4642:          if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
                   4643:              && const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT)
                   4644:            {
                   4645:              int is_shift
                   4646:                = (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
                   4647:              rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
                   4648:              rtx inner_const;
                   4649:              enum rtx_code associate_code;
                   4650:              rtx new_const;
                   4651: 
                   4652:              if (y == 0
                   4653:                  || 0 == (inner_const
                   4654:                           = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0)))
                   4655:                  || GET_CODE (inner_const) != CONST_INT
                   4656:                  /* If we have compiled a statement like
                   4657:                     "if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
                   4658:                     "x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
                   4659:                     of Y is the same as our first operand.  Unless we detect
                   4660:                     this case, an infinite loop will result.  */
                   4661:                  || XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
                   4662:                break;
                   4663: 
                   4664:              /* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
                   4665:                 same constant and it is a power of two.  These might be doable
                   4666:                 with a pre- or post-increment.  Similarly for two subtracts of
                   4667:                 identical powers of two with post decrement.  */
                   4668: 
                   4669:              if (code == PLUS && INTVAL (const_arg1) == INTVAL (inner_const)
                   4670:                  && (0
                   4671: #if defined(HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_INCREMENT)
                   4672:                      || exact_log2 (INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
                   4673: #endif
                   4674: #if defined(HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_DECREMENT)
                   4675:                      || exact_log2 (- INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
                   4676: #endif
                   4677:                  ))
                   4678:                break;
                   4679: 
                   4680:              /* Compute the code used to compose the constants.  For example,
                   4681:                 A/C1/C2 is A/(C1 * C2), so if CODE == DIV, we want MULT.  */
                   4682: 
                   4683:              associate_code
                   4684:                = (code == MULT || code == DIV || code == UDIV ? MULT
                   4685:                   : is_shift || code == PLUS || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
                   4686: 
                   4687:              new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
                   4688:                                                     const_arg1, inner_const);
                   4689: 
                   4690:              if (new_const == 0)
                   4691:                break;
                   4692: 
                   4693:              /* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
                   4694:                 produce a shift of larger than the object.  This could
                   4695:                 occur when we following a sign-extend by a right shift on
                   4696:                 a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair of shifts.  */
                   4697: 
                   4698:              if (is_shift && GET_CODE (new_const) == CONST_INT
                   4699:                  && INTVAL (new_const) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
                   4700:                break;
                   4701: 
                   4702:              y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
                   4703: 
                   4704:              /* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
                   4705:                 can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
                   4706:                 loop if we tried to fold it.  So don't in that case.  */
                   4707: 
                   4708:              if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
                   4709:                y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
                   4710: 
                   4711:              new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, y, new_const);
                   4712:              if (new)
                   4713:                return new;
                   4714: 
                   4715:              return gen_rtx (code, mode, y, new_const);
                   4716:            }
                   4717:        }
                   4718: 
                   4719:       new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
                   4720:                                       const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
                   4721:                                       const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
                   4722:       break;
                   4723: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     4724:     case 'o':
        !          4725:       /* (lo_sum (high X) X) is simply X.  */
        !          4726:       if (code == LO_SUM && const_arg0 != 0
        !          4727:          && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == HIGH
        !          4728:          && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (const_arg0, 0), const_arg1))
        !          4729:        return const_arg1;
        !          4730:       break;
        !          4731: 
1.1       root     4732:     case '3':
                   4733:     case 'b':
                   4734:       new = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
                   4735:                                        const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
                   4736:                                        const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
                   4737:                                        const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
                   4738:       break;
                   4739:     }
                   4740: 
                   4741:   return new ? new : x;
                   4742: }
                   4743: 
                   4744: /* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
                   4745:    Return 0 if we don't know one.  */
                   4746: 
                   4747: static rtx
                   4748: equiv_constant (x)
                   4749:      rtx x;
                   4750: {
                   4751:   if (GET_CODE (x) == REG
                   4752:       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
                   4753:       && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
                   4754:     x = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]);
                   4755: 
                   4756:   if (x != 0 && CONSTANT_P (x))
                   4757:     return x;
                   4758: 
                   4759:   return 0;
                   4760: }
                   4761: 
                   4762: /* Assuming that X is an rtx (e.g., MEM, REG or SUBREG) for a fixed-point
                   4763:    number, return an rtx (MEM, SUBREG, or CONST_INT) that refers to the
                   4764:    least-significant part of X.
                   4765:    MODE specifies how big a part of X to return.  
                   4766: 
                   4767:    If the requested operation cannot be done, 0 is returned.
                   4768: 
                   4769:    This is similar to gen_lowpart in emit-rtl.c.  */
                   4770: 
                   4771: rtx
                   4772: gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, x)
                   4773:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   4774:      register rtx x;
                   4775: {
                   4776:   rtx result = gen_lowpart_common (mode, x);
                   4777: 
                   4778:   if (result)
                   4779:     return result;
                   4780:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
                   4781:     {
                   4782:       /* This is the only other case we handle.  */
                   4783:       register int offset = 0;
                   4784:       rtx new;
                   4785: 
                   4786: #if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
                   4787:       offset = (MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)), UNITS_PER_WORD)
                   4788:                - MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD));
                   4789: #endif
                   4790: #if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
                   4791:       /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data
                   4792:         is unchanged.  */
                   4793:       offset -= (MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
                   4794:                 - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))));
                   4795: #endif
                   4796:       new = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, plus_constant (XEXP (x, 0), offset));
                   4797:       if (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (new, 0)))
                   4798:        return 0;
                   4799:       MEM_VOLATILE_P (new) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (x);
                   4800:       RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x);
                   4801:       MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (new) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x);
                   4802:       return new;
                   4803:     }
                   4804:   else
                   4805:     return 0;
                   4806: }
                   4807: 
                   4808: /* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the "taken"
                   4809:    branch.  It will be zero if not.
                   4810: 
                   4811:    In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence.  For example,
                   4812:    if we are following the taken case of 
                   4813:        if (i == 2)
                   4814:    we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
                   4815: 
                   4816:    In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed.  If the same
                   4817:    comparison is seen later, we will know its value.  */
                   4818: 
                   4819: static void
                   4820: record_jump_equiv (insn, taken)
                   4821:      rtx insn;
                   4822:      int taken;
                   4823: {
                   4824:   int cond_known_true;
                   4825:   rtx op0, op1;
                   4826:   enum machine_mode mode;
                   4827:   int reversed_nonequality = 0;
                   4828:   enum rtx_code code;
                   4829: 
                   4830:   /* Ensure this is the right kind of insn.  */
                   4831:   if (! condjump_p (insn) || simplejump_p (insn))
                   4832:     return;
                   4833: 
                   4834:   /* See if this jump condition is known true or false.  */
                   4835:   if (taken)
                   4836:     cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 2) == pc_rtx);
                   4837:   else
                   4838:     cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 1) == pc_rtx);
                   4839: 
                   4840:   /* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
                   4841:      If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
                   4842:      know that it isn't valid for floating-point.  */
                   4843:   code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0));
                   4844:   op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 0), insn);
                   4845:   op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 1), insn);
                   4846: 
                   4847:   code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1);
                   4848:   if (! cond_known_true)
                   4849:     {
                   4850:       reversed_nonequality = (code != EQ && code != NE);
                   4851:       code = reverse_condition (code);
                   4852:     }
                   4853: 
                   4854:   /* The mode is the mode of the non-constant.  */
                   4855:   mode = GET_MODE (op0);
                   4856:   if (mode == VOIDmode) mode = GET_MODE (op1);
                   4857: 
                   4858:   record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
                   4859: }
                   4860: 
                   4861: /* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
                   4862:    REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
                   4863:    Make any useful entries we can with that information.  Called from
                   4864:    above function and called recursively.  */
                   4865: 
                   4866: static void
                   4867: record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality)
                   4868:      enum rtx_code code;
                   4869:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   4870:      rtx op0, op1;
                   4871:      int reversed_nonequality;
                   4872: {
                   4873:   int op0_hash_code, op1_hash_code;
                   4874:   int op0_in_memory, op0_in_struct, op1_in_memory, op1_in_struct;
                   4875:   struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
                   4876: 
                   4877:   /* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
                   4878:      we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
                   4879:      true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
                   4880:      is not worth testing for with no SUBREG.  */
                   4881: 
                   4882:   if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
                   4883:       && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))))
                   4884:     {
                   4885:       enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
                   4886:       rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
                   4887: 
                   4888:       record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
                   4889:                        tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
                   4890:                        reversed_nonequality);
                   4891:     }
                   4892: 
                   4893:   if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
                   4894:       && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1))))
                   4895:     {
                   4896:       enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
                   4897:       rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
                   4898: 
                   4899:       record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
                   4900:                        tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
                   4901:                        reversed_nonequality);
                   4902:     }
                   4903: 
                   4904:   /* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG 
                   4905:      making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE.  */
                   4906: 
                   4907:   if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
                   4908:       && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
                   4909:       && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))))
                   4910:     {
                   4911:       enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
                   4912:       rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
                   4913: 
                   4914:       record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
                   4915:                        tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
                   4916:                        reversed_nonequality);
                   4917:     }
                   4918: 
                   4919:   if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
                   4920:       && subreg_lowpart_p (op1)
                   4921:       && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1))))
                   4922:     {
                   4923:       enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
                   4924:       rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
                   4925: 
                   4926:       record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
                   4927:                        tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
                   4928:                        reversed_nonequality);
                   4929:     }
                   4930: 
                   4931:   /* Hash both operands.  */
                   4932: 
                   4933:   do_not_record = 0;
                   4934:   hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
                   4935:   hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
                   4936:   op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
                   4937:   op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   4938:   op0_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   4939: 
                   4940:   if (do_not_record)
                   4941:     return;
                   4942: 
                   4943:   do_not_record = 0;
                   4944:   hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
                   4945:   hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
                   4946:   op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
                   4947:   op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   4948:   op1_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   4949:   
                   4950:   if (do_not_record)
                   4951:     return;
                   4952: 
                   4953:   /* Look up both operands.  */
                   4954:   op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash_code, mode);
                   4955:   op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash_code, mode);
                   4956: 
                   4957:   /* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
                   4958:      comparison.  */
                   4959:   if (code != EQ)
                   4960:     {
                   4961:       /* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
                   4962:         register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
                   4963:         do anything.  */
                   4964: 
                   4965:       if (GET_CODE (op1) != REG)
                   4966:        op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
                   4967: 
                   4968:       if ((reversed_nonequality && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
                   4969:          || GET_CODE (op0) != REG || op1 == 0)
                   4970:        return;
                   4971: 
                   4972:       /* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already.  This gives it a
                   4973:         new quantity number.  */
                   4974:       if (op0_elt == 0)
                   4975:        {
                   4976:          if (insert_regs (op0, 0, 0))
                   4977:            {
                   4978:              rehash_using_reg (op0);
                   4979:              op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
                   4980:            }
                   4981: 
                   4982:          op0_elt = insert (op0, 0, op0_hash_code, mode);
                   4983:          op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
                   4984:          op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
                   4985:        }
                   4986: 
                   4987:       qty_comparison_code[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = code;
                   4988:       if (GET_CODE (op1) == REG)
                   4989:        {
                   4990:          /* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number.  */
                   4991:          if (op1_elt == 0)
                   4992:            {
                   4993:              if (insert_regs (op1, 0, 0))
                   4994:                {
                   4995:                  rehash_using_reg (op1);
                   4996:                  op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
                   4997:                }
                   4998: 
                   4999:              op1_elt = insert (op1, 0, op1_hash_code, mode);
                   5000:              op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
                   5001:              op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
                   5002:            }
                   5003: 
                   5004:          qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = reg_qty[REGNO (op1)];
                   5005:          qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = 0;
                   5006:        }
                   5007:       else
                   5008:        {
                   5009:          qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = -1;
                   5010:          qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = op1;
                   5011:        }
                   5012: 
                   5013:       return;
                   5014:     }
                   5015: 
                   5016:   /* If both are equivalent, merge the two classes.  Save this class for
                   5017:      `cse_set_around_loop'.  */
                   5018:   if (op0_elt && op1_elt)
                   5019:     {
                   5020:       merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
                   5021:       last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
                   5022:     }
                   5023: 
                   5024:   /* For whichever side doesn't have an equivalence, make one.  */
                   5025:   if (op0_elt == 0)
                   5026:     {
                   5027:       if (insert_regs (op0, op1_elt, 0))
                   5028:        {
                   5029:          rehash_using_reg (op0);
                   5030:          op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
                   5031:        }
                   5032: 
                   5033:       op0_elt = insert (op0, op1_elt, op0_hash_code, mode);
                   5034:       op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
                   5035:       op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
                   5036:       last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
                   5037:     }
                   5038: 
                   5039:   if (op1_elt == 0)
                   5040:     {
                   5041:       if (insert_regs (op1, op0_elt, 0))
                   5042:        {
                   5043:          rehash_using_reg (op1);
                   5044:          op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
                   5045:        }
                   5046: 
                   5047:       op1_elt = insert (op1, op0_elt, op1_hash_code, mode);
                   5048:       op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
                   5049:       op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
                   5050:       last_jump_equiv_class = op1_elt;
                   5051:     }
                   5052: }
                   5053: 
                   5054: /* CSE processing for one instruction.
                   5055:    First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
                   5056:    in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
                   5057:    Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
                   5058:    of available values. 
                   5059: 
                   5060:    If IN_LIBCALL_BLOCK is nonzero, don't record any equivalence made in
                   5061:    the insn.  */
                   5062: 
                   5063: /* Data on one SET contained in the instruction.  */
                   5064: 
                   5065: struct set
                   5066: {
                   5067:   /* The SET rtx itself.  */
                   5068:   rtx rtl;
                   5069:   /* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing).  */
                   5070:   rtx src;
                   5071:   /* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET.  */
                   5072:   struct table_elt *src_elt;
                   5073:   /* Hash code for the SET_SRC.  */
                   5074:   int src_hash_code;
                   5075:   /* Hash code for the SET_DEST.  */
                   5076:   int dest_hash_code;
                   5077:   /* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped.  */
                   5078:   rtx inner_dest;
                   5079:   /* Place where the pointer to the INNER_DEST was found.  */
                   5080:   rtx *inner_dest_loc;
                   5081:   /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory.  */ 
                   5082:   char src_in_memory;
                   5083:   /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in a structure.  */ 
                   5084:   char src_in_struct;
                   5085:   /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
                   5086:      whose value cannot be predicted and understood.  */
                   5087:   char src_volatile;
                   5088:   /* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT.  */
                   5089:   enum machine_mode mode;
                   5090:   /* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any.  */
                   5091:   rtx src_const;
                   5092:   /* Hash code of constant equivalent for SET_SRC.  */
                   5093:   int src_const_hash_code;
                   5094:   /* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any.  */
                   5095:   struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
                   5096: };
                   5097: 
                   5098: static void
                   5099: cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block)
                   5100:      rtx insn;
                   5101:      int in_libcall_block;
                   5102: {
                   5103:   register rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
                   5104:   rtx tem;
                   5105:   register int i;
                   5106:   register int n_sets = 0;
                   5107: 
                   5108:   /* Records what this insn does to set CC0.  */
                   5109:   rtx this_insn_cc0 = 0;
                   5110:   enum machine_mode this_insn_cc0_mode;
                   5111:   struct write_data writes_memory;
                   5112:   static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
                   5113: 
                   5114:   rtx src_eqv = 0;
                   5115:   struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
                   5116:   int src_eqv_volatile;
                   5117:   int src_eqv_in_memory;
                   5118:   int src_eqv_in_struct;
                   5119:   int src_eqv_hash_code;
                   5120: 
                   5121:   struct set *sets;
                   5122: 
                   5123:   this_insn = insn;
                   5124:   writes_memory = init;
                   5125: 
                   5126:   /* Find all the SETs and CLOBBERs in this instruction.
                   5127:      Record all the SETs in the array `set' and count them.
                   5128:      Also determine whether there is a CLOBBER that invalidates
                   5129:      all memory references, or all references at varying addresses.  */
                   5130: 
                   5131:   if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
                   5132:     {
                   5133:       sets = (struct set *) alloca (sizeof (struct set));
                   5134:       sets[0].rtl = x;
                   5135: 
                   5136:       /* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
                   5137:         They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
                   5138:         The reason is not efficiency but rather
                   5139:         so that we can test at the end for instructions
                   5140:         that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
                   5141:         and not be misled by unchanged instructions
                   5142:         that were unconditional jumps to begin with.  */
                   5143:       if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
                   5144:          && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
                   5145:        ;
                   5146: 
                   5147:       /* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
                   5148:         The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
                   5149:         someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing (and on 80386 is unsafe)!
                   5150:         Ensure we invalidate the destination register.  On the 80386 no
                   5151:         other code would invalidate it since it is a fixed_reg.  */
                   5152: 
                   5153:       else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
                   5154:        {
                   5155:          canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
                   5156:          fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
                   5157:          invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
                   5158:        }
                   5159:       else
                   5160:        n_sets = 1;
                   5161:     }
                   5162:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
                   5163:     {
                   5164:       register int lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
                   5165: 
                   5166:       sets = (struct set *) alloca (lim * sizeof (struct set));
                   5167: 
                   5168:       /* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
                   5169:         and ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
                   5170:         elsewhere in this insn.
                   5171:         When a reg that is clobbered is also used for input,
                   5172:         we should presume that that is for a reason,
                   5173:         and we should not substitute some other register
                   5174:         which is not supposed to be clobbered.
                   5175:         Therefore, this loop cannot be merged into the one below
                   5176:         because a CALL may preceed a CLOBBER and refer to the
                   5177:         value clobbered.  We must not let a canonicalization do
                   5178:         anything in that case.  */
                   5179:       for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
                   5180:        {
                   5181:          register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
                   5182:          if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG)
                   5183:            invalidate (XEXP (y, 0));
                   5184:        }
                   5185:            
                   5186:       for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
                   5187:        {
                   5188:          register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
                   5189:          if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
                   5190:            {
                   5191:              /* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns. */
                   5192:              if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
                   5193:                {
                   5194:                  canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
                   5195:                  fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
                   5196:                  invalidate (SET_DEST (y));
                   5197:                }
                   5198:              else if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
                   5199:                       && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
                   5200:                ;
                   5201:              else
                   5202:                sets[n_sets++].rtl = y;
                   5203:            }
                   5204:          else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
                   5205:            {
                   5206:              /* If we clobber memory, take note of that,
                   5207:                 and canon the address.
                   5208:                 This does nothing when a register is clobbered
                   5209:                 because we have already invalidated the reg.  */
                   5210:              if (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MEM)
                   5211:                {
                   5212:                  canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
                   5213:                  note_mem_written (XEXP (y, 0), &writes_memory);
                   5214:                }
                   5215:            }
                   5216:          else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
                   5217:                   && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
                   5218:                         && REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   5219:            canon_reg (y, 0);
                   5220:          else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
                   5221:            {
                   5222:              canon_reg (y, insn);
                   5223:              fold_rtx (y, insn);
                   5224:            }
                   5225:        }
                   5226:     }
                   5227:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
                   5228:     {
                   5229:       if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM)
                   5230:        {
                   5231:          canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
                   5232:          note_mem_written (XEXP (x, 0), &writes_memory);
                   5233:        }
                   5234:     }
                   5235: 
                   5236:   /* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location.  */
                   5237:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
                   5238:           && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
                   5239:                 && REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   5240:     canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
                   5241:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
                   5242:     {
                   5243:       canon_reg (x, insn);
                   5244:       fold_rtx (x, insn);
                   5245:     }
                   5246: 
                   5247:   if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0)
                   5248:     {
                   5249:       /* Store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV, if different.  */
                   5250:       rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, 0);
                   5251: 
                   5252:       if (tem && ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
                   5253:         src_eqv = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), 0);
                   5254:     }
                   5255: 
                   5256:   /* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
                   5257:      We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
                   5258:      present in the insn pattern.  In that case, we want to ensure that
                   5259:      we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern.  So we will replace
                   5260:      both operands at the same time.  Otherwise, we would fail to find an
                   5261:      equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
                   5262:      (We also speed up that loop when a canonicalization was done since
                   5263:      recog_memoized need not be called for just a canonicalization unless
                   5264:      a pseudo register is being replaced by a hard reg of vice versa.)
                   5265: 
                   5266:      We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
                   5267:      but we don't do this any more.
                   5268: 
                   5269:      ??? The way this code is written now, if we have a MATCH_DUP between
                   5270:      two operands that are pseudos and we would want to canonicalize them
                   5271:      to a hard register, we won't do that.  The only time this would happen
                   5272:      is if the hard reg was a fixed register, and this should be rare.
                   5273: 
                   5274:      ??? This won't work if there is a MATCH_DUP between an input and an
                   5275:      output, but these never worked and must be declared invalid.  */
                   5276: 
                   5277:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   5278:     {
                   5279:       rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
                   5280:       rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
                   5281:       rtx new = canon_reg (src, insn);
                   5282: 
                   5283:       if (GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (src) == REG
                   5284:          && ((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   5285:              != (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
                   5286:        validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new, 0);
                   5287:       else
                   5288:        SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = new;
                   5289: 
                   5290:       if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
                   5291:        {
                   5292:          validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
                   5293:                           canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 0);
                   5294:          validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
                   5295:                           canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 0);
                   5296:        }
                   5297: 
                   5298:       while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
                   5299:             || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
                   5300:             || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
                   5301:        dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
                   5302: 
                   5303:       if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
                   5304:        canon_reg (dest, insn);
                   5305:     }
                   5306: 
                   5307:   /* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
                   5308:      Detect assignments from or to volatile things
                   5309:      and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
                   5310:      in the rest of this function.
                   5311: 
                   5312:      Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains.  */
                   5313: 
                   5314:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   5315:     {
                   5316:       register rtx src, dest;
                   5317:       register rtx src_folded;
                   5318:       register struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
                   5319:       enum machine_mode mode;
                   5320:       rtx src_eqv_here;
                   5321:       rtx src_const = 0;
                   5322:       rtx src_related = 0;
                   5323:       struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
                   5324:       int src_cost = 10000, src_eqv_cost = 10000, src_folded_cost = 10000;
                   5325:       int src_related_cost = 10000, src_elt_cost = 10000;
                   5326:       /* Set non-zero if we need to call force_const_mem on with the
                   5327:         contents of src_folded before using it.  */
                   5328:       int src_folded_force_flag = 0;
                   5329: 
                   5330:       dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
                   5331:       src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
                   5332: 
                   5333:       /* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
                   5334:         hash it with the destination's machine mode.
                   5335:         This way we can keep different modes separate.  */
                   5336: 
                   5337:       mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
                   5338:       sets[i].mode = mode;
                   5339: 
                   5340:       if (src_eqv)
                   5341:        {
                   5342:          enum machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
                   5343:          if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
                   5344:            eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
                   5345:          do_not_record = 0;
                   5346:          hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
                   5347:          hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
                   5348:          src_eqv = fold_rtx (src_eqv, insn);
                   5349:          src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
                   5350: 
                   5351:          /* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression.  */
                   5352: 
                   5353:          if (!do_not_record)
                   5354:            src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
                   5355: 
                   5356:          src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
                   5357:          src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   5358:          src_eqv_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   5359:        }
                   5360: 
                   5361:       /* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
                   5362:         value of the INNER register, not the destination.  So it is not
                   5363:         a legal substitution for the source.  But save it for later.  */
                   5364:       if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
                   5365:        src_eqv_here = 0;
                   5366:       else
                   5367:        src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
                   5368: 
                   5369:       /* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC.  Then get the fully-
                   5370:         simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid.  */
                   5371:       src_folded = fold_rtx (src, insn);
                   5372: 
                   5373:       /* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
                   5374:         so we will be able to record it later.  */
                   5375:       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
                   5376:          || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
                   5377:        {
                   5378:          rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
                   5379: 
                   5380:          if (GET_CODE (src) == CONST_INT
                   5381:              && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
                   5382:              && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   5383:              && (INTVAL (src) & ((-1) << INTVAL (width))))
                   5384:            src_folded = gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   5385:                                  INTVAL (src) & ((1 << INTVAL (width)) - 1));
                   5386:        }
                   5387: 
                   5388:       /* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
                   5389:         should not be recorded at all.  In that case,
                   5390:         prevent any further processing of this assignment.  */
                   5391:       do_not_record = 0;
                   5392:       hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
                   5393:       hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
                   5394: 
                   5395:       sets[i].src = src;
                   5396:       sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
                   5397:       sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
                   5398:       sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   5399:       sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   5400: 
                   5401:       /* If source is a perverse subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
                   5402:         treat it as volatile.  It may do the work of an SI in one context
                   5403:         where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
                   5404:         in general.  */
                   5405:       if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
                   5406:          && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
                   5407:              > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
                   5408:        sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
                   5409: 
                   5410:       /* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC.  Try to replace
                   5411:          SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
                   5412: 
                   5413:          We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
                   5414:          version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
                   5415:         to a constant.
                   5416: 
                   5417:          Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
                   5418:          of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
                   5419:          the same class; we check for this).
                   5420: 
                   5421:         If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
                   5422: 
                   5423:          We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
                   5424:          REG_NOTE.  */
                   5425: 
                   5426:       if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
                   5427:        elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
                   5428: 
                   5429:       sets[i].src_elt = elt;
                   5430: 
                   5431:       if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
                   5432:         {
                   5433:           if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
                   5434:            {
                   5435:              /* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
                   5436:                 classes are now equivalent.  So merge them.  */
                   5437:              merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
                   5438:              src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
                   5439:              src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, elt->mode);
                   5440:            }
                   5441: 
                   5442:           src_eqv_here = 0;
                   5443:         }
                   5444: 
                   5445:       else if (src_eqv_elt)
                   5446:         elt = src_eqv_elt;
                   5447: 
                   5448:       /* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
                   5449:         Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'.  Look in
                   5450:         any known equivalences first.  (If the constant is not in the
                   5451:         table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash_code').  */
                   5452:       if (elt)
                   5453:         for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   5454:          if (p->is_const)
                   5455:            {
                   5456:              src_const = p->exp;
                   5457:              src_const_elt = elt;
                   5458:              break;
                   5459:            }
                   5460: 
                   5461:       if (src_const == 0
                   5462:          && (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
                   5463:              /* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as 
                   5464:                 "constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
                   5465:                 to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used.  */
                   5466:              || (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
                   5467:                  && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
                   5468:                  && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
                   5469:        src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
                   5470:       else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
                   5471:        src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
                   5472: 
                   5473:       /* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
                   5474:         hash code and look it up.  */
                   5475:       if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
                   5476:        {
                   5477:          sets[i].src_const_hash_code = HASH (src_const, mode);
                   5478:          src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash_code,
                   5479:                                  mode);
                   5480:        }
                   5481: 
                   5482:       sets[i].src_const = src_const;
                   5483:       sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
                   5484: 
                   5485:       /* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
                   5486:         equivalent.  Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
                   5487:         isn't, set ELT to it.  */
                   5488:       if (src_const_elt && elt
                   5489:          && src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
                   5490:        merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
                   5491:       else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
                   5492:        elt = src_const_elt;
                   5493: 
                   5494:       /* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
                   5495:          equivalent of SRC.  */
                   5496:       if (src_const
                   5497:          && (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
                   5498:              || (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
                   5499:         {
                   5500:           src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
                   5501:           if (src_related)
                   5502:             {
                   5503:              struct table_elt *src_related_elt
                   5504:                    = lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
                   5505:              if (src_related_elt && elt)
                   5506:                {
                   5507:                  if (elt->first_same_value
                   5508:                      != src_related_elt->first_same_value)
                   5509:                    /* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST 
                   5510:                       involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
                   5511:                       twice.  Merge the involved classes.  */
                   5512:                    merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
                   5513: 
                   5514:                  src_related = 0;
                   5515:                  src_related_elt = 0;
                   5516:                }
                   5517:               else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
                   5518:                elt = src_related_elt;
                   5519:            }
                   5520:         }
                   5521: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     5522:       /* Another possibility is that we have an AND with a constant in
        !          5523:         a mode narrower than a word.  If so, it might have been generated
        !          5524:         as part of an "if" which would narrow the AND.  If we already
        !          5525:         have done the AND in a wider mode, we can use a SUBREG of that
        !          5526:         value.  */
        !          5527: 
        !          5528:       if (flag_expensive_optimizations && ! src_related
        !          5529:          && GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 1)) == CONST_INT
        !          5530:          && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
        !          5531:        {
        !          5532:          enum machine_mode tmode;
        !          5533:          rtx new_and = gen_rtx (AND, VOIDmode, 0, XEXP (src, 1));
        !          5534: 
        !          5535:          for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
        !          5536:               GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD;
        !          5537:               tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
        !          5538:            {
        !          5539:              rtx inner = gen_lowpart_if_possible (tmode, XEXP (src, 0));
        !          5540:              struct table_elt *larger_elt;
        !          5541: 
        !          5542:              if (inner)
        !          5543:                {
        !          5544:                  PUT_MODE (new_and, tmode);
        !          5545:                  XEXP (new_and, 0) = inner;
        !          5546:                  larger_elt = lookup (new_and, HASH (new_and, tmode), tmode);
        !          5547:                  if (larger_elt == 0)
        !          5548:                    continue;
        !          5549: 
        !          5550:                  for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
        !          5551:                       larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
        !          5552:                    if (GET_CODE (larger_elt->exp) == REG)
        !          5553:                      {
        !          5554:                        src_related
        !          5555:                          = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, larger_elt->exp);
        !          5556:                        break;
        !          5557:                      }
        !          5558: 
        !          5559:                  if (src_related)
        !          5560:                    break;
        !          5561:                }
        !          5562:            }
        !          5563:        }
        !          5564:                  
1.1       root     5565:       if (src == src_folded)
                   5566:         src_folded = 0;
                   5567: 
                   5568:       /* At this point, ELT, if non-zero, points to a class of expressions
                   5569:          equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
                   5570:         and SRC_RELATED, if non-zero, each contain additional equivalent
                   5571:         expressions.  Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
                   5572:         already in the equivalence class.
                   5573: 
                   5574:         Check for an equivalent identical to the destination.  If found,
                   5575:         this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
                   5576:         elimination of the insn.  Indicate this by placing it in
                   5577:         `src_related'.  */
                   5578: 
                   5579:       if (elt) elt = elt->first_same_value;
                   5580:       for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   5581:         {
                   5582:          enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
                   5583: 
                   5584:          /* If the expression is not valid, ignore it.  Then we do not
                   5585:             have to check for validity below.  In most cases, we can use
                   5586:             `rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done.  */
                   5587:          if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
                   5588:            continue;
                   5589: 
                   5590:           if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
                   5591:            src = 0;
                   5592:           else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
                   5593:                   && rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
                   5594:            src_folded = 0;
                   5595:           else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
                   5596:                   && rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
                   5597:            src_eqv_here = 0;
                   5598:           else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
                   5599:                   && rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
                   5600:            src_related = 0;
                   5601: 
                   5602:          /* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
                   5603:             to prefer it.  Copy it to src_related.  The code below will
                   5604:             then give it a negative cost.  */
                   5605:          if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
                   5606:            src_related = dest;
                   5607: 
                   5608:         }
                   5609: 
                   5610:       /* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
                   5611:          possibilities.  Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
                   5612:          that are when they are equal cost.  Note that we can never
                   5613:          worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
                   5614:         If we find an equivalent identical to the source, use it as best,
                   5615:         since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case. */
                   5616:       if (src)
                   5617:        {
                   5618:          if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
                   5619:            src_cost = -1;
                   5620:          else
                   5621:            src_cost = COST (src);
                   5622:        }
                   5623: 
                   5624:       if (src_eqv_here)
                   5625:        {
                   5626:          if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
                   5627:            src_eqv_cost = -1;
                   5628:          else
                   5629:            src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here);
                   5630:        }
                   5631: 
                   5632:       if (src_folded)
                   5633:        {
                   5634:          if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
                   5635:            src_folded_cost = -1;
                   5636:          else
                   5637:            src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded);
                   5638:        }
                   5639: 
                   5640:       if (src_related)
                   5641:        {
                   5642:          if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
                   5643:            src_related_cost = -1;
                   5644:          else
                   5645:            src_related_cost = COST (src_related);
                   5646:        }
                   5647: 
                   5648:       /* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
                   5649:         cheaper even though it looks more expensive.  */
                   5650:       if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
                   5651:        src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = -1;
                   5652:          
                   5653:       /* Terminate loop when replacement made.  This must terminate since
                   5654:          the current contents will be tested and will always be valid.  */
                   5655:       while (1)
                   5656:         {
                   5657:           rtx trial;
                   5658: 
                   5659:           /* Skip invalid entries.  */
                   5660:           while (elt && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
                   5661:                 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
                   5662:            elt = elt->next_same_value;      
                   5663:              
                   5664:           if (elt) src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
                   5665: 
                   5666:           /* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time.   For items
                   5667:             of equal cost, use this order:
                   5668:             src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry.  */
                   5669:           if (src_folded_cost <= src_cost
                   5670:              && src_folded_cost <= src_eqv_cost
                   5671:              && src_folded_cost <= src_related_cost
                   5672:              && src_folded_cost <= src_elt_cost)
                   5673:            {
                   5674:              trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = 10000;
                   5675:              if (src_folded_force_flag)
                   5676:                trial = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
                   5677:            }
                   5678:           else if (src_cost <= src_eqv_cost
                   5679:                   && src_cost <= src_related_cost
                   5680:                   && src_cost <= src_elt_cost)
                   5681:            trial = src, src_cost = 10000;
                   5682:           else if (src_eqv_cost <= src_related_cost
                   5683:                   && src_eqv_cost <= src_elt_cost)
                   5684:            trial = src_eqv_here, src_eqv_cost = 10000;
                   5685:           else if (src_related_cost <= src_elt_cost)
                   5686:            trial = src_related, src_related_cost = 10000;
                   5687:           else
                   5688:            {
                   5689:              trial = canon_reg (copy_rtx (elt->exp), 0);
                   5690:              elt = elt->next_same_value;
                   5691:              src_elt_cost = 10000;
                   5692:            }
                   5693: 
                   5694:          /* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
                   5695:             check for this separately here.  We will delete such an
                   5696:             insn below.
                   5697: 
                   5698:             Tablejump insns contain a USE of the table, so simply replacing
                   5699:             the operand with the constant won't match.  This is simply an
                   5700:             unconditional branch, however, and is therefore valid.  Just
                   5701:             insert the substitution here and we will delete and re-emit
                   5702:             the insn later.  */
                   5703: 
                   5704:          if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
                   5705:              && (trial == pc_rtx
                   5706:                  || (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
                   5707:                      && ! condjump_p (insn))))
                   5708:            {
                   5709:              /* If TRIAL is a label in front of a jump table, we are
                   5710:                 really falling through the switch (this is how casesi
                   5711:                 insns work), so we must branch around the table.  */
                   5712:              if (GET_CODE (trial) == CODE_LABEL
                   5713:                  && NEXT_INSN (trial) != 0
                   5714:                  && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (trial)) == JUMP_INSN
                   5715:                  && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC
                   5716:                      || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_VEC))
                   5717: 
                   5718:                trial = gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, get_label_after (trial));
                   5719: 
                   5720:              SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
                   5721:              break;
                   5722:            }
                   5723:           
                   5724:          /* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn.  */
                   5725:           else if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), trial, 0))
                   5726:            break;
                   5727: 
                   5728:          /* If we previously found constant pool entries for 
                   5729:             constants and this is a constant, try making a
                   5730:             pool entry.  Put it in src_folded unless we already have done
                   5731:             this since that is where it likely came from.  */
                   5732: 
                   5733:          else if (constant_pool_entries_cost
                   5734:                   && CONSTANT_P (trial)
                   5735:                   && (src_folded == 0 || GET_CODE (src_folded) != MEM)
                   5736:                   && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
                   5737:            {
                   5738:              src_folded_force_flag = 1;
                   5739:              src_folded = trial;
                   5740:              src_folded_cost = constant_pool_entries_cost;
                   5741:            }
                   5742:         }
                   5743: 
                   5744:       src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
                   5745: 
                   5746:       /* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
                   5747:         However, there is an important exception:  If both are registers
                   5748:         that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
                   5749:         with the head of the class.  If we do not do this, we will have
                   5750:         both registers live over a portion of the basic block.  This way,
                   5751:         their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping.  */
                   5752:       if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG
                   5753:          && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
                   5754:          && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == GET_MODE (dest)
                   5755:          && qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] != REGNO (dest)
                   5756:          && GET_CODE (src) == REG && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
                   5757:          /* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
                   5758:             SET_SRC.  */
                   5759:          && (GET_CODE (sets[i].src) != REG
                   5760:              || REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   5761:        /* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
                   5762:           SRC is a hard register.  */
                   5763:        {
                   5764:          int first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (src)]];
                   5765: 
                   5766:          src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl)
                   5767:            = first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
                   5768:              : gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (src), first);
                   5769: 
                   5770:          /* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
                   5771:             setting SRC to, use that constant.  We ignored it when we
                   5772:             thought we could make this into a no-op.  */
                   5773:          if (src_const && COST (src_const) < COST (src)
                   5774:              && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_const, 0))
                   5775:            src = src_const;
                   5776:        }
                   5777: 
                   5778:       /* If we made a change, recompute SRC values.  */
                   5779:       if (src != sets[i].src)
                   5780:         {
                   5781:           do_not_record = 0;
                   5782:           hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
                   5783:           hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
                   5784:          sets[i].src = src;
                   5785:           sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
                   5786:           sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
                   5787:           sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   5788:           sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   5789:           sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
                   5790:         }
                   5791: 
                   5792:       /* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
                   5793:         equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_NOTE.   We don't want
                   5794:         to write a REG_EQUAL note for a constant pseudo since verifying that
1.1.1.2 ! root     5795:         that pseudo hasn't been eliminated is a pain.  Such a note also
1.1       root     5796:         won't help anything.  */
                   5797:       if (n_sets == 1 && src_const && GET_CODE (dest) == REG
                   5798:          && GET_CODE (src_const) != REG)
                   5799:        {
                   5800:          rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, 0);
                   5801:          
                   5802:          /* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note, making
                   5803:             a new one if one does not already exist.  */
                   5804:          if (tem)
                   5805:            XEXP (tem, 0) = src_const;
                   5806:          else
                   5807:            REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_EQUAL,
                   5808:                                        src_const, REG_NOTES (insn));
                   5809: 
                   5810:           /* If storing a constant value in a register that
                   5811:             previously held the constant value 0,
                   5812:             record this fact with a REG_WAS_0 note on this insn.
                   5813: 
                   5814:             Note that the *register* is required to have previously held 0,
                   5815:             not just any register in the quantity and we must point to the
                   5816:             insn that set that register to zero.
                   5817: 
                   5818:             Rather than track each register individually, we just see if
                   5819:             the last set for this quantity was for this register.  */
                   5820: 
                   5821:          if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
                   5822:              && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == const0_rtx)
                   5823:            {
                   5824:              /* See if we previously had a REG_WAS_0 note.  */
                   5825:              rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, 0);
                   5826:              rtx const_insn = qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]];
                   5827: 
                   5828:              if ((tem = single_set (const_insn)) != 0
                   5829:                  && rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (tem), dest))
                   5830:                {
                   5831:                  if (note)
                   5832:                    XEXP (note, 0) = const_insn;
                   5833:                  else
                   5834:                    REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (INSN_LIST, REG_WAS_0,
                   5835:                                                const_insn, REG_NOTES (insn));
                   5836:                }
                   5837:            }
                   5838:        }
                   5839: 
                   5840:       /* Now deal with the destination.  */
                   5841:       do_not_record = 0;
                   5842:       sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
                   5843: 
                   5844:       /* Look within any SIGN_EXTRACT or ZERO_EXTRACT
                   5845:         to the MEM or REG within it.  */
                   5846:       while (GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
                   5847:             || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
                   5848:             || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
                   5849:             || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
                   5850:        {
                   5851:          sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &XEXP (dest, 0);
                   5852:          dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
                   5853:        }
                   5854: 
                   5855:       sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
                   5856: 
                   5857:       if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
                   5858:        {
                   5859:          dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
                   5860: 
                   5861:          /* Decide whether we invalidate everything in memory,
                   5862:             or just things at non-fixed places.
                   5863:             Writing a large aggregate must invalidate everything
                   5864:             because we don't know how long it is.  */
                   5865:          note_mem_written (dest, &writes_memory);
                   5866:        }
                   5867: 
                   5868:       /* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
                   5869:         before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
                   5870:         since the register values used in the address computation
                   5871:         are those before this instruction.  */
                   5872:       sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, mode);
                   5873: 
                   5874:       /* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
                   5875:         because the value in it after the store
                   5876:         may not equal what was stored, due to truncation.  */
                   5877: 
                   5878:       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
                   5879:          || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
                   5880:        {
                   5881:          rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
                   5882: 
                   5883:          if (src_const != 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
                   5884:              && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
                   5885:              && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   5886:              && ! (INTVAL (src_const) & ((-1) << INTVAL (width))))
                   5887:            /* Exception: if the value is constant,
                   5888:               and it won't be truncated, record it.  */
                   5889:            ;
                   5890:          else
                   5891:            {
                   5892:              /* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
                   5893:                 but no new value will be recorded.
                   5894:                 We must invalidate because sometimes constant
                   5895:                 values can be recorded for bitfields.  */
                   5896:              sets[i].src_elt = 0;
                   5897:              sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
                   5898:              src_eqv = 0;
                   5899:              src_eqv_elt = 0;
                   5900:            }
                   5901:        }
                   5902: 
                   5903:       /* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
                   5904:         the insn.  */
                   5905:       else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
                   5906:        {
                   5907:          PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
                   5908:          NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
                   5909:          NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
                   5910:          cse_jumps_altered = 1;
                   5911:          /* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to.  */
                   5912:          --LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (insn));
                   5913:          /* No more processing for this set.  */
                   5914:          sets[i].rtl = 0;
                   5915:        }
                   5916: 
                   5917:       /* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
                   5918:         be a conditional or computed branch.  So we see if we can follow
                   5919:         it.  If it was a computed branch, delete it and re-emit.  */
                   5920:       else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF)
                   5921:        {
                   5922:          rtx p;
                   5923: 
                   5924:          /* If this is not in the format for a simple branch and
                   5925:             we are the only SET in it, re-emit it.  */
                   5926:          if (! simplejump_p (insn) && n_sets == 1)
                   5927:            {
                   5928:              rtx new = emit_jump_insn_before (gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0)), insn);
                   5929:              JUMP_LABEL (new) = XEXP (src, 0);
                   5930:              LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
                   5931:              delete_insn (insn);
                   5932:              insn = new;
                   5933:            }
                   5934: 
                   5935:          /* Now that we've converted this jump to an unconditional jump,
                   5936:             there is dead code after it.  Delete the dead code until we
                   5937:             reach a BARRIER, the end of the function, or a label.  Do
                   5938:             not delete NOTEs except for NOTE_INSN_DELETED since later
                   5939:             phases assume these notes are retained.  */
                   5940: 
                   5941:          p = insn;
                   5942: 
                   5943:          while (NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
                   5944:                 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != BARRIER
                   5945:                 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != CODE_LABEL)
                   5946:            {
                   5947:              if (GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != NOTE
                   5948:                  || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (NEXT_INSN (p)) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)
                   5949:                delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
                   5950:              else
                   5951:                p = NEXT_INSN (p);
                   5952:            }
                   5953: 
                   5954:          /* If we don't have a BARRIER immediately after INSN, put one there.
                   5955:             Much code assumes that there are no NOTEs between a JUMP_INSN and
                   5956:             BARRIER.  */
                   5957: 
                   5958:          if (NEXT_INSN (insn) == 0
                   5959:              || GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (insn)) != BARRIER)
                   5960:            emit_barrier_after (insn);
                   5961: 
                   5962:          /* We might have two BARRIERs separated by notes.  Delete the second
                   5963:             one if so.  */
                   5964: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     5965:          if (p != insn && NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
        !          5966:              && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) == BARRIER)
1.1       root     5967:            delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
                   5968: 
                   5969:          cse_jumps_altered = 1;
                   5970:          sets[i].rtl = 0;
                   5971:        }
                   5972: 
                   5973:       /* No further processing for this assignment if destination
                   5974:         is volatile.  */
                   5975: 
                   5976:       else if (do_not_record)
                   5977:        sets[i].rtl = 0;
                   5978: 
                   5979:       if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
                   5980:        sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
                   5981: 
                   5982: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                   5983:       /* If setting CC0, record what it was set to, or a constant, if it
                   5984:         is equivalent to a constant.  If it is being set to a floating-point
                   5985:         value, make a COMPARE with the appropriate constant of 0.  If we
                   5986:         don't do this, later code can interpret this as a test against
                   5987:         const0_rtx, which can cause problems if we try to put it into an
                   5988:         insn as a floating-point operand.  */
                   5989:       if (dest == cc0_rtx)
                   5990:        {
                   5991:          this_insn_cc0 = src_const && mode != VOIDmode ? src_const : src;
                   5992:          this_insn_cc0_mode = mode;
                   5993:          if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
                   5994:            this_insn_cc0 = gen_rtx (COMPARE, VOIDmode, this_insn_cc0,
                   5995:                                     CONST0_RTX (mode));
                   5996:        }
                   5997: #endif
                   5998:     }
                   5999: 
                   6000:   /* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
                   6001:      if they are not already present.
                   6002:      Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
                   6003:      This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
                   6004:      the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
                   6005:      (having been invalidated).  */
                   6006: 
                   6007:   if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
                   6008:       && ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
                   6009:     {
                   6010:       register struct table_elt *elt;
                   6011:       register struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
                   6012:       rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
                   6013:       enum machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
                   6014: 
                   6015:       if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
                   6016:        {
                   6017:          eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
                   6018:          classp = 0;
                   6019:        }
                   6020:       if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
                   6021:        src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
                   6022:       elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
                   6023:       elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
                   6024:       elt->in_struct = src_eqv_in_struct;
                   6025:       src_eqv_elt = elt;
                   6026:     }
                   6027: 
                   6028:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   6029:     if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
                   6030:        && ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
                   6031:       {
                   6032:        if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
                   6033:          {
                   6034:            /* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
                   6035:               gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
                   6036:               not just for the subreg being stored in now.
                   6037:               This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
                   6038:               to treat the entire reg as the destination.  */
                   6039:            sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
                   6040:            sets[i].src_hash_code = src_eqv_hash_code;
                   6041:          }
                   6042:        else
                   6043:          {
                   6044:            /* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
                   6045:               already present.  */
                   6046:            register struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
                   6047:            register rtx src = sets[i].src;
                   6048:            register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
                   6049:            enum machine_mode mode
                   6050:              = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
                   6051: 
                   6052:            if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
                   6053:              {
                   6054:                register struct table_elt *elt;
                   6055: 
                   6056:                /* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
                   6057:                   any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
                   6058:                   match if not still valid.  */
                   6059:                if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
                   6060:                  sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
                   6061:                elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
                   6062:                elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
                   6063:                elt->in_struct = sets[i].src_in_struct;
                   6064:                sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
                   6065:              }
                   6066: 
                   6067:            if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
                   6068:                && src != sets[i].src_const
                   6069:                && ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
                   6070:              sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
                   6071:                                        sets[i].src_const_hash_code, mode);
                   6072:          }
                   6073:       }
                   6074:     else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
                   6075:       /* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
                   6076:         volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
                   6077:         so that the destination goes into that class.  */
                   6078:       sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
                   6079: 
                   6080:   invalidate_from_clobbers (&writes_memory, x);
                   6081:   /* Memory, and some registers, are invalidate by subroutine calls.  */
                   6082:   if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
                   6083:     {
                   6084:       static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
                   6085:       invalidate_memory (&everything);
                   6086:       invalidate_for_call ();
                   6087:     }
                   6088: 
                   6089:   /* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
                   6090:      If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
                   6091:      sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
                   6092:      a part of which is being set.  */
                   6093: 
                   6094:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   6095:     if (sets[i].rtl)
                   6096:       {
                   6097:        register rtx dest = sets[i].inner_dest;
                   6098: 
                   6099:        /* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
                   6100:           previous quantity's chain.
                   6101:           Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
                   6102:           we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those.  */
                   6103:        if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
                   6104:            || (! writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
                   6105:          invalidate (dest);
                   6106:       }
                   6107: 
                   6108:   /* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
                   6109:      are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
                   6110:      This removes from the hash table
                   6111:      any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
                   6112: 
                   6113:      We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
                   6114:      we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally.  */
                   6115: 
                   6116:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   6117:     if (sets[i].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) != REG)
                   6118:       mention_regs (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
                   6119: 
                   6120:   /* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
                   6121:      So replace each one with the current head of the same class.  */
                   6122: 
                   6123:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   6124:     if (sets[i].rtl)
                   6125:       {
                   6126:        if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
                   6127:          /* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
                   6128:             or 0 if nothing remains of that class.  */
                   6129:          {
                   6130:            register struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
                   6131: 
                   6132:            while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
                   6133:              elt = elt->prev_same_value;
                   6134: 
                   6135:            while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
                   6136:              elt = elt->next_same_value;
                   6137:            sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
                   6138:          }
                   6139:       }
                   6140: 
                   6141:   /* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes.  */
                   6142: 
                   6143:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   6144:     if (sets[i].rtl)
                   6145:       {
                   6146:        register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
                   6147:        register struct table_elt *elt;
                   6148: 
                   6149:        /* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
                   6150:           floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
                   6151:           memory.  */
                   6152:        if ((flag_float_store
                   6153:             && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
                   6154:             && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (dest)) == MODE_FLOAT)
                   6155:            /* Don't record values of destinations set inside a libcall block
                   6156:               since we might delete the libcall.  Things should have been set
                   6157:               up so we won't want to reuse such a value, but we play it safe
                   6158:               here.  */
                   6159:            || in_libcall_block
                   6160:            /* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
                   6161:               table, there is no point is recording DEST.  */
                   6162:             || sets[i].src_elt == 0)
                   6163:          continue;
                   6164: 
                   6165:        /* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
                   6166:           and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
                   6167:           Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT.  */
                   6168:        if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
                   6169:          dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
                   6170: 
                   6171:        if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG)
                   6172:          /* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities.  */
                   6173:          if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
                   6174:            /* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
                   6175:               recalculated.  */
                   6176:            sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
                   6177: 
                   6178:        elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
                   6179:                      sets[i].dest_hash_code, GET_MODE (dest));
                   6180:        elt->in_memory = GET_CODE (sets[i].inner_dest) == MEM;
                   6181:        if (elt->in_memory)
                   6182:          {
                   6183:            /* This implicitly assumes a whole struct
                   6184:               need not have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P.
                   6185:               But a whole struct is *supposed* to have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P.  */
                   6186:            elt->in_struct = (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
                   6187:                              || sets[i].inner_dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
                   6188:          }
                   6189: 
                   6190:        /* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is wider
                   6191:           than M2, and both M1 and M2 are a single word, we are also doing
                   6192:           (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1 0))) so make that equivalence
                   6193:           as well.
                   6194: 
                   6195:           However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart_if_possible
                   6196:           will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart_if_possible applied to
                   6197:           BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
                   6198:           BAR's equivalences.  If we don't get a simplified form, make 
                   6199:           the SUBREG.  It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
                   6200:           cause two similar assignments to be detected.
                   6201: 
                   6202:           Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
                   6203:           already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table.  */
                   6204: 
                   6205:        if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
                   6206:            && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
                   6207:            && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
                   6208:            && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
                   6209:                >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))))
                   6210:            && sets[i].src_elt != 0)
                   6211:          {
                   6212:            enum machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
                   6213:            struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
                   6214: 
                   6215:            for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
                   6216:                 elt = elt->next_same_value)
                   6217:              {
                   6218:                rtx new_src = 0;
                   6219:                int src_hash;
                   6220:                struct table_elt *src_elt;
                   6221: 
                   6222:                /* Ignore invalid entries.  */
                   6223:                if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
                   6224:                    && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
                   6225:                  continue;
                   6226: 
                   6227:                new_src = gen_lowpart_if_possible (new_mode, elt->exp);
                   6228:                if (new_src == 0)
                   6229:                  new_src = gen_rtx (SUBREG, new_mode, elt->exp, 0);
                   6230: 
                   6231:                src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
                   6232:                src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
                   6233: 
                   6234:                /* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
                   6235:                   already.  */
                   6236:                if (src_elt == 0)
                   6237:                  {
                   6238:                    if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
                   6239:                      src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
                   6240:                    src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
                   6241:                    src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
                   6242:                    src_elt->in_struct = elt->in_struct;
                   6243:                  }
                   6244:                else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
                   6245:                  /* Show that two things that we've seen before are 
                   6246:                     actually the same.  */
                   6247:                  merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
                   6248: 
                   6249:                classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
                   6250:              }
                   6251:          }
                   6252:       }
                   6253: 
                   6254:   /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1)
                   6255:      where REG0 is the "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.
                   6256:      After cse, REG1 will probably not be used in the sequel, 
                   6257:      so (if easily done) change this insn to (set REG1 REG0) and
                   6258:      replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn that computed their value.
                   6259:      Then REG1 will become a dead store and won't cloud the situation
                   6260:      for later optimizations.
                   6261: 
                   6262:      Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
                   6263:      then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
                   6264:      into a three-operand insn.
                   6265: 
                   6266:      Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN.  */
                   6267: 
                   6268:   if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
                   6269:       && NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) == insn
                   6270:       && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
                   6271:       && REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   6272:       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
                   6273:       && (qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))]]
                   6274:          == REGNO (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl))))
                   6275:     {
                   6276:       rtx prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
                   6277:       while (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == NOTE)
                   6278:        prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
                   6279: 
                   6280:       if (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == INSN && GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
                   6281:          && SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
                   6282:        {
                   6283:          rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
                   6284:          rtx note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, 0);
                   6285: 
                   6286:          validate_change (prev, & SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
                   6287:          validate_change (insn, & SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl),
                   6288:                           SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), 1);
                   6289:          validate_change (insn, & SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), dest, 1);
                   6290:          apply_change_group ();
                   6291: 
                   6292:          /* If REG1 was equivalent to a constant, REG0 is not.  */
                   6293:          if (note)
                   6294:            PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_EQUAL);
                   6295: 
                   6296:          /* If there was a REG_WAS_0 note on PREV, remove it.  Move
                   6297:             any REG_WAS_0 note on INSN to PREV.  */
                   6298:          note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_WAS_0, 0);
                   6299:          if (note)
                   6300:            remove_note (prev, note);
                   6301: 
                   6302:          note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, 0);
                   6303:          if (note)
                   6304:            {
                   6305:              remove_note (insn, note);
                   6306:              XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (prev);
                   6307:              REG_NOTES (prev) = note;
                   6308:            }
                   6309:        }
                   6310:     }
                   6311: 
                   6312:   /* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known equivalences due to
                   6313:      the condition being tested.  */
                   6314: 
                   6315:   last_jump_equiv_class = 0;
                   6316:   if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN
                   6317:       && n_sets == 1 && GET_CODE (x) == SET
                   6318:       && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == IF_THEN_ELSE)
                   6319:     record_jump_equiv (insn, 0);
                   6320: 
                   6321: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                   6322:   /* If the previous insn set CC0 and this insn no longer references CC0,
                   6323:      delete the previous insn.  Here we use the fact that nothing expects CC0
                   6324:      to be valid over an insn, which is true until the final pass.  */
                   6325:   if (prev_insn && GET_CODE (prev_insn) == INSN
                   6326:       && (tem = single_set (prev_insn)) != 0
                   6327:       && SET_DEST (tem) == cc0_rtx
                   6328:       && ! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, x))
                   6329:     {
                   6330:       PUT_CODE (prev_insn, NOTE);
                   6331:       NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (prev_insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
                   6332:       NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (prev_insn) = 0;
                   6333:     }
                   6334: 
                   6335:   prev_insn_cc0 = this_insn_cc0;
                   6336:   prev_insn_cc0_mode = this_insn_cc0_mode;
                   6337: #endif
                   6338: 
                   6339:   prev_insn = insn;
                   6340: }
                   6341: 
                   6342: /* Store 1 in *WRITES_PTR for those categories of memory ref
                   6343:    that must be invalidated when the expression WRITTEN is stored in.
                   6344:    If WRITTEN is null, say everything must be invalidated.  */
                   6345: 
                   6346: static void
                   6347: note_mem_written (written, writes_ptr)
                   6348:      rtx written;
                   6349:      struct write_data *writes_ptr;
                   6350: {
                   6351:   static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
                   6352: 
                   6353:   if (written == 0)
                   6354:     *writes_ptr = everything;
                   6355:   else if (GET_CODE (written) == MEM)
                   6356:     {
                   6357:       /* Pushing or popping the stack invalidates just the stack pointer. */
                   6358:       rtx addr = XEXP (written, 0);
                   6359:       if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
                   6360:           || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
                   6361:          && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
                   6362:          && REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
                   6363:        {
                   6364:          writes_ptr->sp = 1;
                   6365:          return;
                   6366:        }
                   6367:       else if (GET_MODE (written) == BLKmode)
                   6368:        *writes_ptr = everything;
                   6369:       else if (cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (written))
                   6370:        {
                   6371:          /* A varying address that is a sum indicates an array element,
                   6372:             and that's just as good as a structure element
                   6373:             in implying that we need not invalidate scalar variables.  */
                   6374:          if (!(MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (written)
                   6375:                || GET_CODE (XEXP (written, 0)) == PLUS))
                   6376:            writes_ptr->all = 1;
                   6377:          writes_ptr->nonscalar = 1;
                   6378:        }
                   6379:       writes_ptr->var = 1;
                   6380:     }
                   6381: }
                   6382: 
                   6383: /* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about an insn
                   6384:    except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
                   6385:    This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
                   6386:    alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.
                   6387: 
                   6388:    W points to the writes_memory for this insn, a struct write_data
                   6389:    saying which kinds of memory references must be invalidated.
                   6390:    X is the pattern of the insn.  */
                   6391: 
                   6392: static void
                   6393: invalidate_from_clobbers (w, x)
                   6394:      struct write_data *w;
                   6395:      rtx x;
                   6396: {
                   6397:   /* If W->var is not set, W specifies no action.
                   6398:      If W->all is set, this step gets all memory refs
                   6399:      so they can be ignored in the rest of this function.  */
                   6400:   if (w->var)
                   6401:     invalidate_memory (w);
                   6402: 
                   6403:   if (w->sp)
                   6404:     {
                   6405:       if (reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM] >= 0)
                   6406:        reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM]++;
                   6407: 
                   6408:       /* This should be *very* rare.  */
                   6409:       if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM))
                   6410:        invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx);
                   6411:     }
                   6412: 
                   6413:   if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
                   6414:     {
                   6415:       rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
                   6416:       if (ref
                   6417:          && (GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
                   6418:              || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && ! w->all)))
                   6419:        invalidate (ref);
                   6420:     }
                   6421:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
                   6422:     {
                   6423:       register int i;
                   6424:       for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   6425:        {
                   6426:          register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
                   6427:          if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
                   6428:            {
                   6429:              rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
                   6430:              if (ref
                   6431:                  &&(GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
                   6432:                     || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && !w->all)))
                   6433:                invalidate (ref);
                   6434:            }
                   6435:        }
                   6436:     }
                   6437: }
                   6438: 
                   6439: /* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn.  Look at any REG_EQUAL notes
                   6440:    and replace any registers in them with either an equivalent constant
                   6441:    or the canonical form of the register.  If we are inside an address,
                   6442:    only do this if the address remains valid.
                   6443: 
                   6444:    OBJECT is 0 except when within a MEM in which case it is the MEM.
                   6445: 
                   6446:    Return the replacement for X.  */
                   6447: 
                   6448: static rtx
                   6449: cse_process_notes (x, object)
                   6450:      rtx x;
                   6451:      rtx object;
                   6452: {
                   6453:   enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
                   6454:   char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   6455:   int qty;
                   6456:   int i;
                   6457: 
                   6458:   switch (code)
                   6459:     {
                   6460:     case CONST_INT:
                   6461:     case CONST:
                   6462:     case SYMBOL_REF:
                   6463:     case LABEL_REF:
                   6464:     case CONST_DOUBLE:
                   6465:     case PC:
                   6466:     case CC0:
                   6467:     case LO_SUM:
                   6468:       return x;
                   6469: 
                   6470:     case MEM:
                   6471:       XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), x);
                   6472:       return x;
                   6473: 
                   6474:     case EXPR_LIST:
                   6475:     case INSN_LIST:
                   6476:       if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
                   6477:        XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
                   6478:       if (XEXP (x, 1))
                   6479:        XEXP (x, 1) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
                   6480:       return x;
                   6481: 
                   6482:     case REG:
                   6483:       i = reg_qty[REGNO (x)];
                   6484: 
                   6485:       /* Return a constant or a constant register.  */
                   6486:       if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
                   6487:          && qty_const[i] != 0
                   6488:          && (CONSTANT_P (qty_const[i])
                   6489:              || GET_CODE (qty_const[i]) == REG))
                   6490:        {
                   6491:          rtx new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[i]);
                   6492:          if (new)
                   6493:            return new;
                   6494:        }
                   6495: 
                   6496:       /* Otherwise, canonicalize this register.  */
                   6497:       return canon_reg (x, 0);
                   6498:     }
                   6499: 
                   6500:   for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
                   6501:     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   6502:       validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, i),
                   6503:                       cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, i), object), 0);
                   6504: 
                   6505:   return x;
                   6506: }
                   6507: 
                   6508: /* Find common subexpressions between the end test of a loop and the beginning
                   6509:    of the loop.  LOOP_START is the CODE_LABEL at the start of a loop.
                   6510: 
                   6511:    Often we have a loop where an expression in the exit test is used
                   6512:    in the body of the loop.  For example "while (*p) *q++ = *p++;".
                   6513:    Because of the way we duplicate the loop exit test in front of the loop,
                   6514:    however, we don't detect that common subexpression.  This will be caught
                   6515:    when global cse is implemented, but this is a quite common case.
                   6516: 
                   6517:    This function handles the most common cases of these common expressions.
                   6518:    It is called after we have processed the basic block ending with the
                   6519:    NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END note that ends a loop and the previous JUMP_INSN
                   6520:    jumps to a label used only once.  */
                   6521: 
                   6522: static void
                   6523: cse_around_loop (loop_start)
                   6524:      rtx loop_start;
                   6525: {
                   6526:   rtx insn;
                   6527:   int i;
                   6528:   struct table_elt *p;
                   6529: 
                   6530:   /* If the jump at the end of the loop doesn't go to the start, we don't
                   6531:      do anything.  */
                   6532:   for (insn = PREV_INSN (loop_start);
                   6533:        insn && (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) >= 0);
                   6534:        insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
                   6535:     ;
                   6536: 
                   6537:   if (insn == 0
                   6538:       || GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
                   6539:       || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) != NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG)
                   6540:     return;
                   6541: 
                   6542:   /* If the last insn of the loop (the end test) was an NE comparison,
                   6543:      we will interpret it as an EQ comparison, since we fell through
                   6544:      the loop.  Any equivalances resulting from that comparison are
                   6545:      therefore not valid and must be invalidated.  */
                   6546:   if (last_jump_equiv_class)
                   6547:     for (p = last_jump_equiv_class->first_same_value; p;
                   6548:         p = p->next_same_value)
                   6549:       if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == MEM || GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
                   6550:          || GET_CODE (p->exp) == SUBREG)
                   6551:        invalidate (p->exp);
                   6552: 
                   6553:   /* Process insns starting after LOOP_START until we hit a CALL_INSN or
                   6554:      a CODE_LABEL (we could handle a CALL_INSN, but it isn't worth it).
                   6555: 
                   6556:      The only thing we do with SET_DEST is invalidate entries, so we
                   6557:      can safely process each SET in order.  It is slightly less efficient
                   6558:      to do so, but we only want to handle the most common cases.  */
                   6559: 
                   6560:   for (insn = NEXT_INSN (loop_start);
                   6561:        GET_CODE (insn) != CALL_INSN && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL
                   6562:        && ! (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE
                   6563:             && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END);
                   6564:        insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
                   6565:     {
                   6566:       if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
                   6567:          && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
                   6568:              || GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == CLOBBER))
                   6569:        cse_set_around_loop (PATTERN (insn), insn, loop_start);
                   6570:       else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
                   6571:               && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
                   6572:        for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   6573:          if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == SET
                   6574:              || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
                   6575:            cse_set_around_loop (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i), insn,
                   6576:                                 loop_start);
                   6577:     }
                   6578: }
                   6579: 
                   6580: /* Used for communication between the following two routines; contains a
                   6581:    value to be checked for modification.  */
                   6582: 
                   6583: static rtx cse_check_loop_start_value;
                   6584: 
                   6585: /* If modifying X will modify the value in CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE,
                   6586:    indicate that fact by setting CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE to 0.  */
                   6587: 
                   6588: static void
                   6589: cse_check_loop_start (x, set)
                   6590:      rtx x;
                   6591:      rtx set;
                   6592: {
                   6593:   if (cse_check_loop_start_value == 0
                   6594:       || GET_CODE (x) == CC0 || GET_CODE (x) == PC)
                   6595:     return;
                   6596: 
                   6597:   if ((GET_CODE (x) == MEM && GET_CODE (cse_check_loop_start_value) == MEM)
                   6598:       || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, cse_check_loop_start_value))
                   6599:     cse_check_loop_start_value = 0;
                   6600: }
                   6601: 
                   6602: /* X is a SET or CLOBBER contained in INSN that was found near the start of
                   6603:    a loop that starts with the label at LOOP_START.
                   6604: 
                   6605:    If X is a SET, we see if its SET_SRC is currently in our hash table.
                   6606:    If so, we see if it has a value equal to some register used only in the
                   6607:    loop exit code (as marked by jump.c).
                   6608: 
                   6609:    If those two conditions are true, we search backwards from the start of
                   6610:    the loop to see if that same value was loaded into a register that still
                   6611:    retains its value at the start of the loop.
                   6612: 
                   6613:    If so, we insert an insn after the load to copy the destination of that
                   6614:    load into the equivalent register and (try to) replace our SET_SRC with that
                   6615:    register.
                   6616: 
                   6617:    In any event, we invalidate whatever this SET or CLOBBER modifies.  */
                   6618: 
                   6619: static void
                   6620: cse_set_around_loop (x, insn, loop_start)
                   6621:      rtx x;
                   6622:      rtx insn;
                   6623:      rtx loop_start;
                   6624: {
                   6625:   rtx p;
                   6626:   struct table_elt *src_elt;
                   6627:   static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
                   6628:   struct write_data writes_memory;
                   6629: 
                   6630:   writes_memory = init;
                   6631: 
                   6632:   /* If this is a SET, see if we can replace SET_SRC, but ignore SETs that
                   6633:      are setting PC or CC0 or whose SET_SRC is already a register.  */
                   6634:   if (GET_CODE (x) == SET
                   6635:       && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != CC0
                   6636:       && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != REG)
                   6637:     {
                   6638:       src_elt = lookup (SET_SRC (x),
                   6639:                        HASH (SET_SRC (x), GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x))),
                   6640:                        GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)));
                   6641: 
                   6642:       if (src_elt)
                   6643:        for (src_elt = src_elt->first_same_value; src_elt;
                   6644:             src_elt = src_elt->next_same_value)
                   6645:          if (GET_CODE (src_elt->exp) == REG && REG_LOOP_TEST_P (src_elt->exp)
                   6646:              && COST (src_elt->exp) < COST (SET_SRC (x)))
                   6647:            {
                   6648:              rtx p, set;
                   6649: 
                   6650:              /* Look for an insn in front of LOOP_START that sets
                   6651:                 something in the desired mode to SET_SRC (x) before we hit
                   6652:                 a label or CALL_INSN.  */
                   6653: 
                   6654:              for (p = prev_nonnote_insn (loop_start);
                   6655:                   p && GET_CODE (p) != CALL_INSN
                   6656:                   && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL;
                   6657:                   p = prev_nonnote_insn  (p))
                   6658:                if ((set = single_set (p)) != 0
                   6659:                    && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) == REG
                   6660:                    && GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) == src_elt->mode
                   6661:                    && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (set), SET_SRC (x)))
                   6662:                  {
                   6663:                    /* We now have to ensure that nothing between P
                   6664:                       and LOOP_START modified anything referenced in
                   6665:                       SET_SRC (x).  We know that nothing within the loop
                   6666:                       can modify it, or we would have invalidated it in
                   6667:                       the hash table.  */
                   6668:                    rtx q;
                   6669: 
                   6670:                    cse_check_loop_start_value = SET_SRC (x);
                   6671:                    for (q = p; q != loop_start; q = NEXT_INSN (q))
                   6672:                      if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (q)) == 'i')
                   6673:                        note_stores (PATTERN (q), cse_check_loop_start);
                   6674: 
                   6675:                    /* If nothing was changed and we can replace our
                   6676:                       SET_SRC, add an insn after P to copy its destination
                   6677:                       to what we will be replacing SET_SRC with.  */
                   6678:                    if (cse_check_loop_start_value
                   6679:                        && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (x),
                   6680:                                            src_elt->exp, 0))
                   6681:                      emit_insn_after (gen_move_insn (src_elt->exp,
                   6682:                                                      SET_DEST (set)),
                   6683:                                       p);
                   6684:                    break;
                   6685:                  }
                   6686:            }
                   6687:     }
                   6688: 
                   6689:   /* Now invalidate anything modified by X.  */
                   6690:   note_mem_written (SET_DEST (x), &writes_memory);
                   6691: 
                   6692:   if (writes_memory.var)
                   6693:     invalidate_memory (&writes_memory);
                   6694: 
                   6695:   /* See comment on similar code in cse_insn for explanation of these tests. */
                   6696:   if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == REG || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
                   6697:       || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == MEM && ! writes_memory.all
                   6698:          && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (SET_DEST (x))))
                   6699:     invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
                   6700: }
                   6701: 
                   6702: /* Find the end of INSN's basic block and return its range,
                   6703:    the total number of SETs in all the insns of the block, the last insn of the
                   6704:    block, and the branch path.
                   6705: 
                   6706:    The branch path indicates which branches should be followed.  If a non-zero
                   6707:    path size is specified, the block should be rescanned and a different set
                   6708:    of branches will be taken.  The branch path is only used if
                   6709:    FLAG_CSE_FOLLOW_JUMPS is non-zero.
                   6710: 
                   6711:    DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, defined below, that is
                   6712:    used to describe the block.  It is filled in with the information about
                   6713:    the current block.  The incoming structure's branch path, if any, is used
                   6714:    to construct the output branch path.  */
                   6715: 
                   6716: /* Define maximum length of a branch path.  */
                   6717: 
                   6718: #define PATHLENGTH     20
                   6719: 
                   6720: struct cse_basic_block_data {
                   6721:   /* Lowest CUID value of insns in block.  */
                   6722:   int low_cuid;
                   6723:   /* Highest CUID value of insns in block.  */
                   6724:   int high_cuid;
                   6725:   /* Total number of SETs in block.  */
                   6726:   int nsets;
                   6727:   /* Last insn in the block.  */
                   6728:   rtx last;
                   6729:   /* Size of current branch path, if any.  */
                   6730:   int path_size;
                   6731:   /* Current branch path, indicating which branches will be taken.  */
                   6732:   struct branch_path {
                   6733:     /* The branch insn. */
                   6734:     rtx branch;
                   6735:     /* Whether it should be taken or not.  */
                   6736:     enum taken {TAKEN, NOT_TAKEN} status;
                   6737:   } path[PATHLENGTH];
                   6738: };
                   6739: 
                   6740: void
                   6741: cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, data, follow_jumps, after_loop)
                   6742:      rtx insn;
                   6743:      struct cse_basic_block_data *data;
                   6744:      int follow_jumps;
                   6745:      int after_loop;
                   6746: {
                   6747:   rtx p = insn, q;
                   6748:   int nsets = 0;
                   6749:   int low_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn), high_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn);
                   6750:   int path_size = data->path_size;
                   6751:   int path_entry = 0;
                   6752:   int i;
                   6753: 
                   6754:   /* Update the previous branch path, if any.  If the last branch was
                   6755:      previously TAKEN, mark it NOT_TAKEN.  If it was previously NOT_TAKEN,
                   6756:      shorten the path by one and look at the previous branch.  We know that
                   6757:      at least one branch must have been taken if PATH_SIZE is non-zero.  */
                   6758:   while (path_size > 0)
                   6759:     {
                   6760:       if (data->path[path_size - 1].status == TAKEN)
                   6761:        {
                   6762:          data->path[path_size - 1].status = NOT_TAKEN;
                   6763:          break;
                   6764:        }
                   6765:       else
                   6766:        path_size--;
                   6767:     }
                   6768: 
                   6769:   /* Scan to end of this basic block.  */
                   6770:   while (p && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL)
                   6771:     {
                   6772:       /* Don't cse out the end of a loop.  This makes a difference
                   6773:         only for the unusual loops that always execute at least once;
                   6774:         all other loops have labels there so we will stop in any case.
                   6775:         Cse'ing out the end of the loop is dangerous because it
                   6776:         might cause an invariant expression inside the loop
                   6777:         to be reused after the end of the loop.  This would make it
                   6778:         hard to move the expression out of the loop in loop.c,
                   6779:         especially if it is one of several equivalent expressions
                   6780:         and loop.c would like to eliminate it.
                   6781: 
                   6782:         If we are running after loop.c has finished, we can ignore
                   6783:         the NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END.  */
                   6784: 
                   6785:       if (! after_loop && GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
                   6786:          && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END)
                   6787:        break;
                   6788: 
                   6789:       /* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg vax)
                   6790:         the regs restored by the longjmp come from
                   6791:         a later time than the setjmp.  */
                   6792:       if (GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
                   6793:          && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
                   6794:        break;
                   6795: 
                   6796:       /* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
                   6797:         especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS.  */
                   6798:       if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p)) == 'i'
                   6799:          && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == PARALLEL)
                   6800:        nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (p), 0);
                   6801:       else if (GET_CODE (p) != NOTE)
                   6802:        nsets += 1;
                   6803:        
                   6804:       if (INSN_CUID (p) > high_cuid)
                   6805:         high_cuid = INSN_CUID (p);
                   6806:       if (INSN_CUID (p) < low_cuid)
                   6807:         low_cuid = INSN_CUID(p);
                   6808: 
                   6809:       /* See if this insn is in our branch path.  If it is and we are to
                   6810:         take it, do so.  */
                   6811:       if (path_entry < path_size && data->path[path_entry].branch == p)
                   6812:        {
                   6813:          if (data->path[path_entry].status == TAKEN)
                   6814:            p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
                   6815:          
                   6816:          /* Point to next entry in path, if any.  */
                   6817:          path_entry++;
                   6818:        }
                   6819: 
                   6820:       /* If this is a conditional jump, we can follow it if -fcse-follow-jumps
                   6821:         was specified, we haven't reached our maximum path length, there are
                   6822:         insns following the target of the jump, this is the only use of the
1.1.1.2 ! root     6823:         jump label, and the target label is preceded by a BARRIER.  */
1.1       root     6824:       else if (follow_jumps && path_size < PATHLENGTH - 1
                   6825:               && GET_CODE (p) == JUMP_INSN
                   6826:               && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == SET
                   6827:               && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (p))) == IF_THEN_ELSE
                   6828:               && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (p)) == 1
                   6829:               && NEXT_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)) != 0)
                   6830:        {
                   6831:          for (q = PREV_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)); q; q = PREV_INSN (q))
                   6832:            if ((GET_CODE (q) != NOTE
                   6833:                 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
                   6834:                 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
                   6835:                && (GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL || LABEL_NUSES (q) != 0))
                   6836:              break;
                   6837: 
                   6838:          /* If we ran into a BARRIER, this code is an extension of the
                   6839:             basic block when the branch is taken.  */
                   6840:          if (q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) == BARRIER)
                   6841:            {
                   6842:              /* Don't allow ourself to keep walking around an
                   6843:                 always-executed loop.  */
                   6844:              if (next_real_insn (q) == next_real_insn (insn))
                   6845:                break;
                   6846: 
                   6847:              /* Similarly, don't put a branch in our path more than once.  */
                   6848:              for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
                   6849:                if (data->path[i].branch == p)
                   6850:                  break;
                   6851: 
                   6852:              if (i != path_entry)
                   6853:                break;
                   6854: 
                   6855:              data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
                   6856:              data->path[path_entry++].status = TAKEN;
                   6857: 
                   6858:              /* This branch now ends our path.  It was possible that we
                   6859:                 didn't see this branch the last time around (when the
                   6860:                 insn in front of the target was a JUMP_INSN that was
                   6861:                 turned into a no-op).  */
                   6862:              path_size = path_entry;
                   6863: 
                   6864:              p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
                   6865:              /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later.  */
                   6866:              PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
                   6867:            }
                   6868:        }
                   6869:        
                   6870:       p = NEXT_INSN (p);
                   6871:     }
                   6872: 
                   6873:   data->low_cuid = low_cuid;
                   6874:   data->high_cuid = high_cuid;
                   6875:   data->nsets = nsets;
                   6876:   data->last = p;
                   6877: 
                   6878:   /* If all jumps in the path are not taken, set our path length to zero
                   6879:      so a rescan won't be done.  */
                   6880:   for (i = path_size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   6881:     if (data->path[i].status == TAKEN)
                   6882:       break;
                   6883: 
                   6884:   if (i == -1)
                   6885:     data->path_size = 0;
                   6886:   else
                   6887:     data->path_size = path_size;
                   6888: 
                   6889:   /* End the current branch path.  */
                   6890:   data->path[path_size].branch = 0;
                   6891: }
                   6892: 
                   6893: static rtx cse_basic_block ();
                   6894: 
                   6895: /* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
                   6896:    F is the first instruction.
                   6897:    NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
                   6898: 
                   6899:    AFTER_LOOP is 1 if this is the cse call done after loop optimization
                   6900:    (only if -frerun-cse-after-loop).
                   6901: 
                   6902:    Returns 1 if jump_optimize should be redone due to simplifications
                   6903:    in conditional jump instructions.  */
                   6904: 
                   6905: int
                   6906: cse_main (f, nregs, after_loop, file)
                   6907:      rtx f;
                   6908:      int nregs;
                   6909:      int after_loop;
                   6910:      FILE *file;
                   6911: {
                   6912:   struct cse_basic_block_data val;
                   6913:   register rtx insn = f;
                   6914:   register int i;
                   6915: 
                   6916:   cse_jumps_altered = 0;
                   6917:   constant_pool_entries_cost = 0;
                   6918:   val.path_size = 0;
                   6919: 
                   6920:   init_recog ();
                   6921: 
                   6922:   max_reg = nregs;
                   6923: 
                   6924:   all_minus_one = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6925:   consec_ints = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6926: 
                   6927:   for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
                   6928:     {
                   6929:       all_minus_one[i] = -1;
                   6930:       consec_ints[i] = i;
                   6931:     }
                   6932: 
                   6933:   reg_next_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6934:   reg_prev_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6935:   reg_qty = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6936:   reg_in_table = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6937:   reg_tick = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6938: 
                   6939:   /* Discard all the free elements of the previous function
                   6940:      since they are allocated in the temporarily obstack.  */
                   6941:   bzero (table, sizeof table);
                   6942:   free_element_chain = 0;
                   6943:   n_elements_made = 0;
                   6944: 
                   6945:   /* Find the largest uid.  */
                   6946: 
                   6947:   i = get_max_uid ();
                   6948:   uid_cuid = (short *) alloca ((i + 1) * sizeof (short));
                   6949:   bzero (uid_cuid, (i + 1) * sizeof (short));
                   6950: 
                   6951:   /* Compute the mapping from uids to cuids.
                   6952:      CUIDs are numbers assigned to insns, like uids,
                   6953:      except that cuids increase monotonically through the code.
                   6954:      Don't assign cuids to line-number NOTEs, so that the distance in cuids
                   6955:      between two insns is not affected by -g.  */
                   6956: 
                   6957:   for (insn = f, i = 0; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
                   6958:     {
                   6959:       if (GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
                   6960:          || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) < 0)
                   6961:        INSN_CUID (insn) = ++i;
                   6962:       else
                   6963:        /* Give a line number note the same cuid as preceding insn.  */
                   6964:        INSN_CUID (insn) = i;
                   6965:     }
                   6966: 
                   6967:   /* Initialize which registers are clobbered by calls.  */
                   6968: 
                   6969:   CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call);
                   6970: 
                   6971:   for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
                   6972:     if ((call_used_regs[i]
                   6973:         /* Used to check !fixed_regs[i] here, but that isn't safe;
                   6974:            fixed regs are still call-clobbered, and sched can get
                   6975:            confused if they can "live across calls".
                   6976: 
                   6977:            The frame pointer is always preserved across calls.  The arg
                   6978:            pointer is if it is fixed.  The stack pointer usually is, unless
                   6979:            RETURN_POPS_ARGS, in which case an explicit CLOBBER
                   6980:            will be present.  If we are generating PIC code, the PIC offset
                   6981:            table register is preserved across calls.  */
                   6982: 
                   6983:         && i != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
                   6984:         && i != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
                   6985: #if ARG_POINTER_REGNUM != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
                   6986:         && ! (i == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[i])
                   6987: #endif
                   6988: #ifdef PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
                   6989:         && ! (i == PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM && flag_pic)
                   6990: #endif
                   6991:         )
                   6992:        || global_regs[i])
                   6993:       SET_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i);
                   6994: 
                   6995:   /* Loop over basic blocks.
                   6996:      Compute the maximum number of qty's needed for each basic block
                   6997:      (which is 2 for each SET).  */
                   6998:   insn = f;
                   6999:   while (insn)
                   7000:     {
                   7001:       int tem;
                   7002: 
                   7003:       cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, flag_cse_follow_jumps, after_loop);
                   7004: 
                   7005:       /* If this basic block was already processed or has no sets, skip it.  */
                   7006:       if (val.nsets == 0 || GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
                   7007:        {
                   7008:          PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
                   7009:          insn = (val.last ? NEXT_INSN (val.last) : 0);
                   7010:          val.path_size = 0;
                   7011:          continue;
                   7012:        }
                   7013: 
                   7014:       cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
                   7015:       cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
                   7016:       max_qty = val.nsets * 2;
                   7017:       
                   7018:       if (file)
                   7019:        fprintf (file, ";; Processing block from %d to %d, %d sets.\n",
                   7020:                 INSN_UID (insn), val.last ? INSN_UID (val.last) : 0,
                   7021:                 val.nsets);
                   7022: 
                   7023:       /* Make MAX_QTY bigger to give us room to optimize
                   7024:         past the end of this basic block, if that should prove useful.  */
                   7025:       if (max_qty < 500)
                   7026:        max_qty = 500;
                   7027: 
                   7028:       max_qty += max_reg;
                   7029: 
                   7030:       /* If this basic block is being extended by following certain jumps,
                   7031:          (see `cse_end_of_basic_block'), we reprocess the code from the start.
                   7032:          Otherwise, we start after this basic block.  */
                   7033:       if (val.path_size > 0)
                   7034:         cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, 0);
                   7035:       else
                   7036:        {
                   7037:          int old_cse_jumps_altered = cse_jumps_altered;
                   7038:          rtx temp;
                   7039: 
                   7040:          /* When cse changes a conditional jump to an unconditional
                   7041:             jump, we want to reprocess the block, since it will give
                   7042:             us a new branch path to investigate.  */
                   7043:          cse_jumps_altered = 0;
                   7044:          temp = cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, ! after_loop);
                   7045:          if (cse_jumps_altered == 0 || flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0)
                   7046:            insn = temp;
                   7047: 
                   7048:          cse_jumps_altered |= old_cse_jumps_altered;
                   7049:        }
                   7050: 
                   7051: #ifdef USE_C_ALLOCA
                   7052:       alloca (0);
                   7053: #endif
                   7054:     }
                   7055: 
                   7056:   /* Tell refers_to_mem_p that qty_const info is not available.  */
                   7057:   qty_const = 0;
                   7058: 
                   7059:   if (max_elements_made < n_elements_made)
                   7060:     max_elements_made = n_elements_made;
                   7061: 
                   7062:   return cse_jumps_altered;
                   7063: }
                   7064: 
                   7065: /* Process a single basic block.  FROM and TO and the limits of the basic
                   7066:    block.  NEXT_BRANCH points to the branch path when following jumps or
                   7067:    a null path when not following jumps.
                   7068: 
                   7069:    AROUND_LOOP is non-zero if we are to try to cse around to the start of a
                   7070:    loop.  This is true when we are being called for the last time on a
                   7071:    block and this CSE pass is before loop.c.  */
                   7072: 
                   7073: static rtx
                   7074: cse_basic_block (from, to, next_branch, around_loop)
                   7075:      register rtx from, to;
                   7076:      struct branch_path *next_branch;
                   7077:      int around_loop;
                   7078: {
                   7079:   register rtx insn;
                   7080:   int to_usage = 0;
                   7081:   int in_libcall_block = 0;
                   7082: 
                   7083:   /* Each of these arrays is undefined before max_reg, so only allocate
                   7084:      the space actually needed and adjust the start below.  */
                   7085: 
                   7086:   qty_first_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
                   7087:   qty_last_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
                   7088:   qty_mode= (enum machine_mode *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum machine_mode));
                   7089:   qty_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
                   7090:   qty_const_insn = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
                   7091:   qty_comparison_code
                   7092:     = (enum rtx_code *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum rtx_code));
                   7093:   qty_comparison_qty = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
                   7094:   qty_comparison_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
                   7095: 
                   7096:   qty_first_reg -= max_reg;
                   7097:   qty_last_reg -= max_reg;
                   7098:   qty_mode -= max_reg;
                   7099:   qty_const -= max_reg;
                   7100:   qty_const_insn -= max_reg;
                   7101:   qty_comparison_code -= max_reg;
                   7102:   qty_comparison_qty -= max_reg;
                   7103:   qty_comparison_const -= max_reg;
                   7104: 
                   7105:   new_basic_block ();
                   7106: 
                   7107:   /* TO might be a label.  If so, protect it from being deleted.  */
                   7108:   if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
                   7109:     ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
                   7110: 
                   7111:   for (insn = from; insn != to; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
                   7112:     {
                   7113:       register enum rtx_code code;
                   7114: 
                   7115:       /* See if this is a branch that is part of the path.  If so, and it is
                   7116:         to be taken, do so.  */
                   7117:       if (next_branch->branch == insn)
                   7118:        {
                   7119:          if (next_branch++->status == TAKEN)
                   7120:            {
                   7121:              record_jump_equiv (insn, 1);
                   7122:              /* Set the last insn as the jump insn; it doesn't affect cc0.
                   7123:                 Then follow this branch.  */
                   7124: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                   7125:              prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
                   7126: #endif
                   7127:              prev_insn = insn;
                   7128:              insn = JUMP_LABEL (insn);
                   7129:              continue;
                   7130:            }
                   7131:        }
                   7132:         
                   7133:       code = GET_CODE (insn);
                   7134:       if (GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
                   7135:        PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
                   7136: 
                   7137:       if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
                   7138:        {
                   7139:          /* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms when
                   7140:             looking for duplicate operations.  */
                   7141: 
                   7142:          if (REG_NOTES (insn))
                   7143:            REG_NOTES (insn) = cse_process_notes (REG_NOTES (insn), 0);
                   7144: 
                   7145:          /* Track when we are inside in LIBCALL block.  Inside such a block,
                   7146:             we do not want to record destinations.  The last insn of a
                   7147:             LIBCALL block is not considered to be part of the block, since
                   7148:             its desitination is the result of the block and hence should be
                   7149:             recorded.  */
                   7150: 
                   7151:          if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, 0))
                   7152:            in_libcall_block = 1;
                   7153:          else if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, 0))
                   7154:            in_libcall_block = 0;
                   7155: 
                   7156:          cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block);
                   7157:        }
                   7158: 
                   7159:       /* If INSN is now an unconditional jump, skip to the end of our
                   7160:         basic block by pretending that we just did the last insn in the
                   7161:         basic block.  If we are jumping to the end of our block, show
                   7162:         that we can have one usage of TO.  */
                   7163: 
                   7164:       if (simplejump_p (insn))
                   7165:        {
                   7166:          if (to == 0)
                   7167:            return 0;
                   7168: 
                   7169:          if (JUMP_LABEL (insn) == to)
                   7170:            to_usage = 1;
                   7171: 
                   7172:          insn = PREV_INSN (to);
                   7173:        }
                   7174: 
                   7175:       /* See if it is ok to keep on going past the label
                   7176:         which used to end our basic block.  Remember that we incremented
1.1.1.2 ! root     7177:         the count of that label, so we decrement it here.  If we made
1.1       root     7178:         a jump unconditional, TO_USAGE will be one; in that case, we don't
                   7179:         want to count the use in that jump.  */
                   7180: 
                   7181:       if (to != 0 && NEXT_INSN (insn) == to
                   7182:          && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL && --LABEL_NUSES (to) == to_usage)
                   7183:        {
                   7184:          struct cse_basic_block_data val;
                   7185: 
                   7186:          insn = NEXT_INSN (to);
                   7187: 
                   7188:          if (LABEL_NUSES (to) == 0)
                   7189:            delete_insn (to);
                   7190: 
                   7191:          /* Find the end of the following block.  Note that we won't be
                   7192:             following branches in this case.  If TO was the last insn
                   7193:             in the function, we are done.  Similarly, if we deleted the
1.1.1.2 ! root     7194:             insn after TO, it must have been because it was preceded by
1.1       root     7195:             a BARRIER.  In that case, we are done with this block because it
                   7196:             has no continuation.  */
                   7197: 
                   7198:          if (insn == 0 || INSN_DELETED_P (insn))
                   7199:            return 0;
                   7200: 
                   7201:          to_usage = 0;
                   7202:          val.path_size = 0;
                   7203:          cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, 0, 0);
                   7204: 
                   7205:          /* If the tables we allocated have enough space left
                   7206:             to handle all the SETs in the next basic block,
                   7207:             continue through it.  Otherwise, return,
                   7208:             and that block will be scanned individually.  */
                   7209:          if (val.nsets * 2 + next_qty > max_qty)
                   7210:            break;
                   7211: 
                   7212:          cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
                   7213:          cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
                   7214:          to = val.last;
                   7215: 
                   7216:          /* Prevent TO from being deleted if it is a label.  */
                   7217:          if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
                   7218:            ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
                   7219: 
                   7220:          /* Back up so we process the first insn in the extension.  */
                   7221:          insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
                   7222:        }
                   7223:     }
                   7224: 
                   7225:   if (next_qty > max_qty)
                   7226:     abort ();
                   7227: 
                   7228:   /* If we are running before loop.c, we stopped on a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END, and
                   7229:      the previous insn is the only insn that branches to the head of a loop,
                   7230:      we can cse into the loop.  Don't do this if we changed the jump
                   7231:      structure of a loop unless we aren't going to be following jumps.  */
                   7232: 
                   7233:   if ((cse_jumps_altered == 0 || flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0)
                   7234:       && around_loop && to != 0
                   7235:       && GET_CODE (to) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (to) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
                   7236:       && GET_CODE (PREV_INSN (to)) == JUMP_INSN
                   7237:       && JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)) != 0
                   7238:       && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to))) == 1)
                   7239:     cse_around_loop (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)));
                   7240: 
                   7241:   return to ? NEXT_INSN (to) : 0;
                   7242: }
                   7243: 
                   7244: /* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
                   7245:    COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
                   7246:    we count each register usage.  */
                   7247: 
                   7248: static void
                   7249: count_reg_usage (x, counts, incr)
                   7250:      rtx x;
                   7251:      int *counts;
                   7252:      int incr;
                   7253: {
                   7254:   enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
                   7255:   char *fmt;
                   7256:   int i, j;
                   7257: 
                   7258:   switch (code)
                   7259:     {
                   7260:     case REG:
                   7261:       counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
                   7262:       return;
                   7263: 
                   7264:     case PC:
                   7265:     case CC0:
                   7266:     case CONST:
                   7267:     case CONST_INT:
                   7268:     case CONST_DOUBLE:
                   7269:     case SYMBOL_REF:
                   7270:     case LABEL_REF:
                   7271:     case CLOBBER:
                   7272:       return;
                   7273: 
                   7274:     case SET:
                   7275:       /* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST.  */
                   7276:       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != REG)
                   7277:        count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, incr);
                   7278:       count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts, incr);
                   7279:       return;
                   7280: 
                   7281:     case INSN:
                   7282:     case JUMP_INSN:
                   7283:     case CALL_INSN:
                   7284:       count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, incr);
                   7285: 
                   7286:       /* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
                   7287:         use them.  */
                   7288: 
                   7289:       if (REG_NOTES (x))
                   7290:        count_reg_usage (REG_NOTES (x), counts, incr);
                   7291:       return;
                   7292: 
                   7293:     case EXPR_LIST:
                   7294:     case INSN_LIST:
                   7295:       if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
                   7296:        count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, incr);
                   7297:       if (XEXP (x, 1))
                   7298:        count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, incr);
                   7299:       return;
                   7300:     }
                   7301: 
                   7302:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   7303:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   7304:     {
                   7305:       if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   7306:        count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, incr);
                   7307:       else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   7308:        for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
                   7309:          count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, incr);
                   7310:     }
                   7311: }
                   7312: 
                   7313: /* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
                   7314:    that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
                   7315: 
                   7316:    This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse.  It improves the
                   7317:    heuristics in loop since it won't try to move dead invariants out of loops
                   7318:    or make givs for dead quantities.  The remaining passes of the compilation
                   7319:    are also sped up.  */
                   7320: 
                   7321: void
                   7322: delete_dead_from_cse (insns, nreg)
                   7323:      rtx insns;
                   7324:      int nreg;
                   7325: {
                   7326:   int *counts = (int *) alloca (nreg * sizeof (int));
                   7327:   rtx insn;
1.1.1.2 ! root     7328:   rtx tem;
1.1       root     7329:   int i;
                   7330: 
                   7331:   /* First count the number of times each register is used.  */
                   7332:   bzero (counts, sizeof (int) * nreg);
                   7333:   for (insn = next_real_insn (insns); insn; insn = next_real_insn (insn))
                   7334:     count_reg_usage (insn, counts, 1);
                   7335: 
                   7336:   /* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
                   7337:      registers or copy a register to itself.  As we delete an insn, remove
                   7338:      usage counts for registers it uses.  */
                   7339:   for (insn = prev_real_insn (get_last_insn ());
                   7340:        insn; insn = prev_real_insn (insn))
                   7341:     {
                   7342:       int live_insn = 0;
                   7343: 
                   7344:       if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
                   7345:        {
                   7346:          if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == REG
                   7347:              && SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
                   7348:            ;
                   7349: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     7350: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
        !          7351:          else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == CC0
        !          7352:                   && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
        !          7353:                   && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
        !          7354:                       || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
        !          7355:                       || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
        !          7356:            ;
        !          7357: #endif
1.1       root     7358:          else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) != REG
                   7359:                   || REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   7360:                   || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)))] != 0
                   7361:                   || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn))))
                   7362:            live_insn = 1;
                   7363:        }
                   7364:       else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
                   7365:        for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   7366:          {
                   7367:            rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
                   7368: 
                   7369:            if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
                   7370:              {
                   7371:                if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == REG
                   7372:                    && SET_DEST (elt) == SET_SRC (elt))
                   7373:                  ;
                   7374: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     7375: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
        !          7376:                else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == CC0
        !          7377:                         && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt))
        !          7378:                         && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
        !          7379:                             || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
        !          7380:                             || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
        !          7381:                  ;
        !          7382: #endif
1.1       root     7383:                else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) != REG
                   7384:                         || REGNO (SET_DEST (elt)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   7385:                         || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (elt))] != 0
                   7386:                         || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt)))
                   7387:                  live_insn = 1;
                   7388:              }
                   7389:            else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
                   7390:              live_insn = 1;
                   7391:          }
                   7392:       else
                   7393:        live_insn = 1;
                   7394: 
                   7395:       /* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
                   7396:         being used.  If this is the last insn of a libcall sequence, don't
                   7397:         delete it even if it is dead because we don't know how to do so
                   7398:         here.  */
                   7399: 
                   7400:       if (! live_insn && ! find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, 0))
                   7401:        {
                   7402:          count_reg_usage (insn, counts, -1);
                   7403:          PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
                   7404:          NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
                   7405:          NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
                   7406:        }
                   7407:     }
                   7408: }

unix.superglobalmegacorp.com

This archive runs on limited infrastructure. Preserving old code on modern bandwidth. Automated agents are requested to crawl responsibly.